HP LaserJet Enterprise M5039xs Multifunction Printer User guide

HP LaserJet Enterprise M5039xs Multifunction Printer User guide
HP LaserJet M5039xs MFP
User Guide
HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP
User Guide
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
© 2010 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Part number: CE966-90901
Edition 1, 03/2010
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR
logo® are U.S. registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
Table of contents
1 Basics .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Product features ................................................................................................................................... 2
Features comparison ............................................................................................................................ 3
Walkaround .......................................................................................................................................... 5
Device parts ......................................................................................................................... 5
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................... 7
Device software .................................................................................................................................... 8
Supported operating systems .............................................................................................. 8
Supported printer drivers ..................................................................................................... 8
Select the correct printer driver ............................................................................................ 9
Universal printer drivers ...................................................................................... 9
Driver Autoconfiguration ...................................................................................... 9
Update Now ...................................................................................................... 10
HP Driver Configuration .................................................................................... 10
Priority for print settings ..................................................................................................... 10
Open the printer drivers ..................................................................................................... 11
Software for Macintosh computers .................................................................................... 12
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems ...................................... 12
Utilities ............................................................................................................................... 13
HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................................................. 13
Embedded Web server ..................................................................................... 13
Other components and utilities .......................................................................... 14
2 Control panel ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Use the control panel ......................................................................................................................... 16
Control-panel layout ........................................................................................................... 16
Home screen ..................................................................................................................... 17
Buttons on the touchscreen ............................................................................................... 18
Control-panel help system ................................................................................................. 18
Use the Administration menu ............................................................................................................. 19
Navigate the Administration menu ..................................................................................... 19
Information menu ............................................................................................................... 20
Default Job Options menu ................................................................................................. 21
Default Options for Originals ............................................................................. 21
ENWW
iii
Default Copy Options ........................................................................................ 22
Default Fax Options .......................................................................................... 23
Default E-mail Options ...................................................................................... 24
Default Send to Folder Options ......................................................................... 25
Default Print Options ......................................................................................... 26
Time/Scheduling menu ...................................................................................................... 27
Management menu ............................................................................................................ 29
Initial Setup menu .............................................................................................................. 30
Networking and I/O ........................................................................................... 30
Fax Setup .......................................................................................................... 38
E-mail Setup ...................................................................................................... 41
Send Setup menu ............................................................................................. 41
Device Behavior menu ....................................................................................................... 42
Print Quality menu ............................................................................................................. 46
Troubleshooting menu ....................................................................................................... 48
Resets menu ...................................................................................................................... 52
Service menu ..................................................................................................................... 52
3 I/O Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 53
USB configuration .............................................................................................................................. 54
Network configuration ......................................................................................................................... 55
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters ........................................................................................ 55
Set an IP address .............................................................................................. 55
Set the subnet mask ......................................................................................... 56
Set the default gateway ..................................................................................... 56
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters ........................................................................................ 57
Disable network protocols (optional) .................................................................................. 57
Disable IPX/SPX ............................................................................................... 57
Disable AppleTalk ............................................................................................. 58
Disable DLC/LLC .............................................................................................. 58
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers ........................................................................................... 58
4 Media and trays ............................................................................................................................................. 59
General guidelines for media ............................................................................................................. 60
Paper to avoid .................................................................................................................... 60
Paper that can damage the device .................................................................................... 60
General media specifications ............................................................................................. 61
Considerations for special media ....................................................................................................... 62
Select the correct fuser mode ............................................................................................ 65
Select print media ............................................................................................................................... 66
Automatic size-sensing ...................................................................................................... 66
Supported media weights and sizes .................................................................................. 67
Printing and paper-storage environment ............................................................................................ 70
iv
ENWW
Load media into the input trays .......................................................................................................... 71
Load tray 1 (multipurpose tray) .......................................................................................... 71
Customize tray 1 operation ................................................................................................ 73
Load trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6) .......................................................... 74
Load special media ............................................................................................................ 76
Load documents for faxing, copying, and scanning ........................................................................... 77
Load a document onto the scanner glass .......................................................................... 77
Load the automatic document feeder (ADF) ...................................................................... 79
Print on rotated media ....................................................................................................................... 81
Print full-bleed images ....................................................................................................................... 82
Print on custom-size media ............................................................................................................... 83
Guidelines for printing on custom-size paper .................................................................... 83
Set custom paper sizes ..................................................................................................... 83
Load custom-size media into tray 1 ................................................................................... 84
Load custom-size media into trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6) ..................... 84
Control print jobs ................................................................................................................................ 86
5 Device features ............................................................................................................................................. 87
Use the stapler ................................................................................................................................... 88
Load staples ...................................................................................................................... 89
Staple media ...................................................................................................................... 91
Use job storage features .................................................................................................................... 93
Gain access to the job storage features ............................................................................ 93
Use the proof and hold feature .......................................................................................... 94
Create a proof and hold job ............................................................................... 94
Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job ............................................ 94
Delete a proof and hold job ............................................................................... 94
Use the private job feature ................................................................................................. 95
Create a private job ........................................................................................... 95
Print a private job .............................................................................................. 95
Delete a private job ........................................................................................... 95
Use the QuickCopy feature ................................................................................................ 96
Create a QuickCopy job .................................................................................... 96
Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job ........................................................ 96
Delete a QuickCopy job .................................................................................... 96
Use the stored job feature ................................................................................................. 97
Create a stored copy job ................................................................................... 97
Create a stored print job .................................................................................... 97
Print a stored job ............................................................................................... 98
Delete a stored job ............................................................................................ 98
6 Printing tasks ................................................................................................................................................ 99
Use features in the Windows printer driver ...................................................................................... 100
ENWW
v
Create and use quick sets ............................................................................................... 100
Use watermarks ............................................................................................................... 101
Resize documents ........................................................................................................... 101
Set a custom paper size from the printer driver ............................................................... 102
Use different paper and printing covers ........................................................................... 102
Print a blank first page ..................................................................................................... 102
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper ..................................................................... 103
Print on both sides of the paper ....................................................................................... 104
Use automatic duplex printing ......................................................................... 104
Print on both sides manually ........................................................................... 105
Layout options for printing on both sides ........................................................ 105
Use the Services tab ........................................................................................................ 106
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver ..................................................................................... 107
Create and use presets ................................................................................................... 107
Print a cover page ............................................................................................................ 108
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper ..................................................................... 108
Print on both sides of the paper ....................................................................................... 109
Cancel a print job ............................................................................................................................. 110
Stop the current print job from the control panel .............................................................. 110
Stop the current print job from the software program ...................................................... 110
7 Copy ............................................................................................................................................................. 111
Use the Copy screen ........................................................................................................................ 112
Set the default copy options ............................................................................................................. 113
Basic copy instructions ..................................................................................................................... 114
Copy from the scanner glass ........................................................................................... 114
Copy from the document feeder ...................................................................................... 114
Adjust the copy settings ................................................................................................................... 115
Change the copy-collation setting .................................................................................................... 116
Copy two-sided documents .............................................................................................................. 117
Copying two-sided documents manually ......................................................................... 117
Copy two-sided documents automatically (duplex models only) ..................................... 117
Copy mixed-size originals ................................................................................................................ 119
Copy photos and books .................................................................................................................... 120
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build ............................................................................................. 121
Cancel a copy job ............................................................................................................................. 122
8 Scan and send e-mail ................................................................................................................................. 123
Configure e-mail settings .................................................................................................................. 124
Supported protocols ......................................................................................................... 124
Configure e-mail server settings ...................................................................................... 124
Find gateways .................................................................................................................. 125
Find the SMTP gateway from the device control panel ................................... 125
vi
ENWW
Find the SMTP gateway from an e-mail program ........................................... 125
Use the Send E-mail screen ............................................................................................................. 126
Perform basic e-mail functions ......................................................................................................... 127
Load documents .............................................................................................................. 127
Send documents .............................................................................................................. 128
Send a document ............................................................................................ 128
Use the auto-complete function ...................................................................... 128
Use the address book ...................................................................................................................... 129
Create a recipient list ....................................................................................................... 129
Use the local address book ............................................................................................. 130
Add e-mail addresses to the local address book ............................................ 130
Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book .................................... 130
Change e-mail settings for the current job ....................................................................................... 131
Scan to a folder ................................................................................................................................ 132
Scan to a workflow destination ......................................................................................................... 132
9 Fax ................................................................................................................................................................ 133
Analog fax ........................................................................................................................................ 134
Install the fax accessory .................................................................................................. 134
Connect the fax accessory to a phone line ...................................................................... 138
Configure and use the fax features .................................................................................. 138
Digital fax .......................................................................................................................................... 139
10 Manage and maintain the device ............................................................................................................. 141
Use information pages ..................................................................................................................... 142
Configure e-mail alerts ..................................................................................................................... 144
Use the embedded Web server ........................................................................................................ 145
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ................................... 145
Embedded Web server sections ...................................................................................... 146
Use HP Web Jetadmin software ...................................................................................................... 147
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh ........................................................................................... 148
Open the HP Printer Utility ............................................................................................... 148
HP Printer Utility features ................................................................................................ 149
Manage supplies .............................................................................................................................. 150
Supplies life ..................................................................................................................... 150
Approximate print-cartridge replacement intervals .......................................................... 150
Manage the print cartridge ............................................................................................... 150
Print-cartridge storage ..................................................................................... 150
Use genuine HP print cartridges ..................................................................... 150
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges .............................................................. 150
Print-cartridge authentication .......................................................................... 151
HP fraud hotline and Web site ........................................................................ 151
Replace supplies and parts .............................................................................................................. 152
ENWW
vii
Supply replacement guidelines ........................................................................................ 152
Change the print cartridge ............................................................................................... 152
Perform preventive maintenance ..................................................................................... 155
Preventive maintenance for the print engine .................................................. 155
The ADF maintenance kit ................................................................................ 155
Clean the device ............................................................................................................................... 156
Clean the exterior ............................................................................................................ 156
Clean the scanner glass .................................................................................................. 156
Clean the scanner lid backing .......................................................................................... 157
Clean the ADF ................................................................................................................. 157
Clean the paper path ....................................................................................................... 158
Calibrate the scanner ....................................................................................................................... 159
11 Problem solving ........................................................................................................................................ 161
Problem-solving checklist ................................................................................................................. 162
Factors that affect performance ....................................................................................... 162
Problem-solving flowchart ................................................................................................................ 163
Solve general printing problems ....................................................................................................... 168
Control-panel message types ........................................................................................................... 171
Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................. 172
Common causes of jams .................................................................................................................. 180
Jam locations ................................................................................................................................... 181
Jam recovery .................................................................................................................................... 182
Clear jams ........................................................................................................................................ 183
Clear jams from the automatic document feeder (ADF) .................................................. 183
Clear jams from the stapler/stacker ................................................................................. 186
Clear jams from the output path ...................................................................................... 188
Clear jams from the optional duplexer ............................................................................. 189
Clear jams from the print-cartridge area .......................................................................... 191
Clear jams from the input-tray areas ............................................................................... 193
Clear jams from the tray 1 input area .............................................................. 193
Clear jams from the input areas of trays 2 and 3 ............................................ 193
Clear jams from the input areas of optional trays ............................................ 195
Solve repeated jams ........................................................................................................ 197
Clear staple jams .............................................................................................................................. 198
Solve print-quality problems ............................................................................................................. 201
Print-quality problems associated with media .................................................................. 201
Print-quality problems associated with the environment .................................................. 201
Print-quality problems associated with jams .................................................................... 201
Image defect examples .................................................................................................... 201
Light print (partial page) .................................................................................................. 203
Light print (entire page) ................................................................................................... 204
Specks ............................................................................................................................ 205
viii
ENWW
Dropouts ......................................................................................................................... 205
Lines ............................................................................................................................... 206
Gray background ............................................................................................................ 206
Toner smear ................................................................................................................... 207
Loose toner ..................................................................................................................... 207
Repeating defects ........................................................................................................... 208
Repeating image .............................................................................................................. 208
Misformed characters ..................................................................................................... 209
Page skew ....................................................................................................................... 209
Curl or wave .................................................................................................................... 210
Wrinkles or creases ........................................................................................................ 210
Vertical white lines .......................................................................................................... 211
Tire tracks ....................................................................................................................... 211
White spots on black ....................................................................................................... 211
Scattered lines ................................................................................................................ 212
Blurred print .................................................................................................................... 212
Random image repetition ................................................................................................ 213
Solve network printing problems ...................................................................................................... 214
Solve fax problems ........................................................................................................................... 215
Solve sending problems .................................................................................................. 215
Solve receiving problems ................................................................................................. 216
Solve copy problems ........................................................................................................................ 217
Prevent copy problems .................................................................................................... 217
Image problems ............................................................................................................... 217
Media-handling problems ................................................................................................ 218
Performance problems .................................................................................................... 220
Solve e-mail problems ...................................................................................................................... 221
Validate the SMTP gateway address ............................................................................... 221
Validate the LDAP gateway address ............................................................................... 221
Solve common Windows problems ................................................................................................. 222
Solve common Macintosh problems ................................................................................................ 223
Solve Linux problems ....................................................................................................................... 226
Solve PostScript problems ............................................................................................................... 227
General problems ............................................................................................................ 227
Appendix A Supplies and accessories ........................................................................................................ 229
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................ 230
Part numbers .................................................................................................................................... 231
Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 231
Supplies and maintenance kits ........................................................................................ 231
Memory ............................................................................................................................ 231
Cables and interfaces ...................................................................................................... 231
Print media ....................................................................................................................... 232
ENWW
ix
Appendix B Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 235
Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 236
Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 237
Acoustic emissions ........................................................................................................................... 238
Operating environment ..................................................................................................................... 238
Appendix C Regulatory information ............................................................................................................ 239
FCC regulations ............................................................................................................................... 240
Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................... 241
Protecting the environment .............................................................................................. 241
Ozone production ............................................................................................................ 241
Power consumption ......................................................................................................... 241
Toner consumption .......................................................................................................... 241
Paper use ........................................................................................................................ 241
Plastics ............................................................................................................................ 241
HP LaserJet print supplies ............................................................................................... 242
HP print supplies returns and recycling program information .......................................... 242
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 242
Material restrictions .......................................................................................................... 243
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union .... 243
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................ 244
For more information ....................................................................................................... 244
Telecom statement ........................................................................................................................... 245
Declaration of conformity .................................................................................................................. 246
Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 247
Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 247
Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 247
VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................. 247
Power cord statement (Japan) ......................................................................................... 247
EMC statement (Korea) ................................................................................................... 247
EMI statement (Taiwan) ................................................................................................... 247
Laser statement for Finland ............................................................................................. 248
Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards ........................................................................ 249
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 250
Installing printer memory .................................................................................................................. 251
To install printer memory ................................................................................................. 251
Check DIMM installation ................................................................................................................... 254
Save resources (permanent resources) .......................................................................................... 255
Enable memory for Windows ........................................................................................................... 255
Using HP Jetdirect print server cards ............................................................................................... 256
Install an HP Jetdirect print server card ........................................................................... 256
Remove an HP Jetdirect print server card ....................................................................... 257
x
ENWW
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................................... 259
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 263
ENWW
xi
xii
ENWW
1
ENWW
Basics
●
Product features
●
Features comparison
●
Walkaround
●
Device software
1
Product features
HP LaserJet M5039XS
2
●
Prints up to 35 ppm.
●
256 MB of RAM, upgradable up to 512 MB
●
100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1) and two 250-sheet input trays (trays 2 and 3)
●
250-sheet output bin
●
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port and EIO slot
●
HP Jetdirect full-featured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-T/100Base-TX networks
●
Enhanced digital sending
●
Flatbed scanner and 50-page ADF
●
Automatic 2–sided (duplex) printing, receiving faxes, and copying.
●
V.34 fax modem and 4-MB flash fax-storage memory.
●
Three 500-sheet input trays (trays 4, 5, and 6)
●
Automatic 30-page stapler with a 500-sheet output bin
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Features comparison
Feature
Description
Performance
●
460 MHz processor
User interface
●
Graphical touch-screen control panel with control-panel help
●
Windows® and Macintosh printer drivers
●
Embedded Web server
●
HP PCL 5
●
HP PCL 6
●
PostScript® 3 emulation
●
FastRes 1200—produces 1200-dots-per-inch (dpi) print quality for fast, high-quality printing of business text
and graphics
●
ProRes 1200—produces 1200-dpi printing for the best quality in line art and graphic images
●
40 gigabyte (GB) hard drive
●
Fonts, forms, and other macros
●
Job retention
●
80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript 3 emulation
●
80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution
●
Additional fonts can be added by installing a USB font card.
●
Fax capability
●
Integrated stand that contains three 500-sheet input trays.
●
Duplexer
●
Automatic 30-page stapler with a 500-sheet output bin
●
100-pin 133 MHz dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Control-panel animations (for example, jam recovery)
●
E-mail compatibility
●
A sleep feature that saves energy
●
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning
Printer drivers
Resolution
Storage features
Fonts
Accessories
Copying and
sending
NOTE:
ENWW
An automatic duplex printing accessory is required for two-sided copying.
Features comparison
3
Feature
Description
Connectivity
●
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 connection (one external host USB-A connector, one external-device USB-B connector, and
two internal host USB-A connectors)
●
HP Jetdirect full-featured embedded print server
●
HP Web Jetadmin software
●
Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot
●
FIH connector
●
Sleep delay setting
●
ENERGY STAR® qualified
●
The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
●
The device checks for and authentic HP print cartridge at cartridge installation.
●
The online user guide is compatible with text screen-readers.
●
The print cartridge can be installed and removed by using one hand.
●
All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.
●
Media can be loaded into input trays by using one hand.
Environmental
features
Supplies
Accessibility
4
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Walkaround
Device parts
Before using the device, familiarize yourself with the parts of the device.
Figure 1-1 HP LaserJet M5039XS
ENWW
1
On/off switch
2
Power connection
3
Automatic duplexer
4
Jam access door (for access to printer jams)
5
Upper-left door
6
ADF top cover (for access to ADF jams)
7
ADF input tray (for fax/copy/scan documents)
8
Control panel
9
Automatic stapler
10
Output bin
11
Tray 2
12
Tray 3
13
Trays 4, 5, and 6
14
ADF output bin
15
Stapler output bin
16
Upper-right door (for access to the print cartridge)
17
Interface ports (see Interface ports on page 7)
18
Tray 1 (pull to open)
Walkaround
5
6
19
Right-side access door
20
Lower-right access door
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Interface ports
The device has one EIO slot and three ports for connecting to a computer or a network.
ENWW
1
EIO slot
2
"Heartbeat" LED
3
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 connection
4
USB accessory connection
5
Foreign interface harness (FIH) port
6
Network connection
7
Fax connection (for connecting to an optional analog fax accessory)
Walkaround
7
Device software
The printing-system software is only available for download from the Web. See the getting started guide
for installation instructions.
The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators, and printer drivers for
access to the features and communication with the computer.
NOTE: For a list of printer drivers and updated software, go to www.hp.com/go/
ljm5039mfp_software.
Supported operating systems
The device supports the following operating systems:
Printer driver only
●
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Mac OS X V10.3, V10.4 and later
●
Linux (Web only)
●
UNIX model scripts (Web only)
NOTE: For Mac OS V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.
Supported printer drivers
Operating system
PCL 5
PCL 6
Postscript level 3
emulation
Windows
Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4 and later
Linux1
1
For Linux, download the postscript level 3 emulation driver from www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.
8
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Select the correct printer driver
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the features of the device and allow the computer to
communicate with the device (using a printer language).
The device uses the PCL 5, PCL 6, and PostScript 3 emulation printer description language (PDL)
drivers.
●
Use the PCL 6 printer driver for the best overall performance.
●
Use the PCL 5 printer driver for general office printing.
●
Use the PS driver for printing from PostScript-based programs, for compatibility with PostScript
Level 3 needs, or for PS flash font support.
Operating system1
PCL 5
PCL 6
PS 3 emulation
Windows XP (32-bit)2
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (64-bit)
Mac OS X V10.2 and later
1
Not all features are available from all drivers or operating systems.
2
For Windows XP (64-bit), download the PCL 6 driver from www.hp.com/go/ljm5039mfp_software.
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.
Universal printer drivers
The HP Universal Print Driver Series for Windows includes separate HP postscript level 3 emulation
and HP PCL 5 versions of a single driver that provides access to almost any HP device while providing
system administrator with tools to manage devices more effectively. For more information, go to
www.hp.com/go/universalprintdriver.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 5, PCL 6, and PS level 3 emulation drivers for Windows XP feature automatic
discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories
that the Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline
memory modules (DIMMs).
ENWW
Device software
9
Update Now
If you have modified the device configuration since installation, the driver can be automatically updated
with the new configuration. In the Properties dialog box (see Open the printer drivers on page 11),
on the Device Settings tab, click the Update Now button to update the driver.
HP Driver Configuration
HP Driver Configuration is a software architecture and set of tools that you can use to customize and
distribute HP software in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Configuration,
information technology (IT) administrators can configure the printing and default settings for HP printer
drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver
Configuration Support Guide, which is available at www.hp.com/go/dcu.
Priority for print settings
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
10
●
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed
anywhere else.
●
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
●
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings
anywhere else in the printing software.
●
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog
boxes.
●
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority
than changes made anywhere else.
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Open the printer drivers
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the default settings To change the device
for all print jobs
configuration settings
Windows XP, Vista,
7, and Server 2003
1.
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
2.
Select the driver, and then
click Properties or
Preferences.
2.
Right-click the driver icon,
and then select Printing
Preferences.
2.
Right-click the driver icon,
and then select
Properties.
3.
Click the Device Settings
tab.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
Mac OS X V10.3,
V10.4 and later
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Open Utilities, and then
open Printer Setup Utility.
3.
Click on the print queue.
3.
On the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
4.
On the Printers menu, click
Show Info.
5.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
ENWW
NOTE: Configuration settings
might not be available in Classic
mode.
Device software
11
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
For network connections, use the embedded Web server (EWS) to configure the device. See Embedded
Web server on page 13.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device
features. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.
●
HP Printer Utility
Use the HP Printer Utility to set up device features that are not available in the printer driver:
◦
Name the device.
◦
Assign the device to a zone on the network.
◦
Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the device.
◦
Download files and fonts.
◦
Configure the device for IP or AppleTalk printing.
You can use the HP Printer Utility when your device uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is
connected to a TCP/IP-based network. For more information, see Use the HP Printer Utility for
Macintosh on page 148.
NOTE: The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.3 or later.
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
12
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
Utilities
The device is equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the device on a
network.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your
intranet, and it should be be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
When installed on a host server, any client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported
Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating
to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
Embedded Web server
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,
see Use information pages on page 142.)
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see Use the
embedded Web server on page 145.
ENWW
Device software
13
Other components and utilities
14
Windows
Macintosh OS
●
●
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) — use with the
Apple PostScript drivers that come with the Mac OS
●
The HP Printer Utility — change device settings, view
status, and set up printer-event notification from a Mac.
This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.3 and later.
Software installer — automates the printing system
installation
Chapter 1 Basics
ENWW
2
ENWW
Control panel
●
Use the control panel
●
Use the Administration menu
15
Use the control panel
The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons
and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and
three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.
16
1
Attention light
The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires
intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message
on the touchscreen.
2
Data light
The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.
3
Ready light
The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any
job.
4
Brightness-adjustment dial
Turn the dial to control the brightness of the touchscreen.
5
Touchscreen graphical display
Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.
6
Numeric keypad
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other
numeric values.
7
Sleep button
If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a
sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device,
press the Sleep button.
8
Reset button
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.
9
Stop button
Stops the active job. While stopped, the control panel shows the options for
the stopped job (for example, if you press the Stop button while the device
is processing a print job, the control panel message prompts you to cancel
or resume the print job).
10
Start button
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been
interrupted.
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Home screen
The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.
NOTE: Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that
appear on the home screen can vary.
1
ENWW
Features
Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear
in this area can include any of the following items:
●
Copy
●
Fax
●
E-mail
●
Secondary E-mail
●
Network Folder
●
Job Storage
●
Workflow
●
Supplies Status
●
Administration
2
Device status line
The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in
this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in
the status line, see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 18.
3
Copy count
The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.
4
Help button
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
5
Scroll bar
Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.
6
Sign Out
Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features.
After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.
7
Network Address
Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.
8
Date and time
The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that
the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.
Use the control panel
17
Buttons on the touchscreen
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons
can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.
Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.
Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.
NOTE: The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button
is named Start Copy.
Stop button. If the device is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start
button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The device prompts you to cancel the job or to resume
it.
Error button. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before
it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has
instructions for solving the problem.
Warning button. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue
functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also
has instructions for solving the problem.
Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see
Control-panel help system on page 18.
Control-panel help system
The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system,
touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can
browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options
for that screen.
If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error ( ) or warning ( ) button to open a
message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
18
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
Use the administration menu to set up default device behavior and other global settings, such as the
language and the format for date and time.
Navigate the Administration menu
From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to
the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.
The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen. Touch
the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains
sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To
return to the previous level, touch Back.
To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.
The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.
Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global Help
system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu.
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
19
Information menu
Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.
Table 2-1 Information menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Configuration/Status
Pages
Fax Reports
Values
Description
Administration Menu
Map
Print (button)
Shows the basic structure of the
Administration menu and current
administration settings.
Configuration Page
Print (button)
A set of configuration pages that show the
current device settings.
Supplies Status
Page
Print (button)
Shows the status of supplies such as
cartridges, maintenance kits, and staples.
Usage Page
Print (button)
Shows information about the number of
pages that have been printed on each paper
type and size.
File Directory
Print (button)
A directory page that contains information for
any mass-storage devices, such as flash
drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are
installed in this device.
Fax Activity Log
Print (button)
Contains a list of the faxes that have been
sent from or received by this device.
Fax Call Report
Print (button)
A detailed report of the last fax operation,
either sent or received.
Thumbnail on Report
Yes
Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail
of the first page of the fax on the report.
Fax Call Report
Sub-menu item
No (default)
When to Print Report
Never auto print
Print after any fax job
Print after fax send jobs
Print after any fax error
Print after send errors only
Print after receive errors only
Sample Pages/Fonts
20
Billing Codes Report
Print
A list of billing codes that have been used for
outgoing faxes. This report shows how many
sent faxes were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List
Print
A list of phone numbers that are blocked from
sending faxes to this device.
Speed Dial List
Print
Shows the speed dials that have been set up
for this device.
PCL Font List
Print
A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts
that are currently available on the device.
PS Font List
Print
A list of PostScript (PS) fonts that are
currently available on the device.
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Default Job Options menu
Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. If the user does not specify the job
options when creating the job, the default options are used.
The Default Job Options menu contains the following sub-menus:
●
Default Options for Originals
●
Default Copy Options
●
Default Fax Options
●
Default E-mail Options
●
Default Send To Folder Options
●
Default Print Options
Default Options for Originals
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Paper Size
Select a paper size from the list.
Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan
originals.
Number of Sides
1 (default)
Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or
double-sided.
2
Orientation
Portrait (default)
Landscape
Optimize Text/Picture
Manually Adjust (default)
Text
Photograph
Image Adjustment
ENWW
Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan
originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select
Landscape if the long edge is at the top.
Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of original.
You can optimize the output for text, pictures, or a mixture.
If you select Manually Adjust, you can specify the mix of text and
pictures that will most often be used.
Darkness
Use this setting to optimize the output for darker or lighter originals
that you scan or copy.
Background Cleanup
Increase the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images
from the background or to remove a light background color.
Sharpness
Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.
Use the Administration menu
21
Default Copy Options
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-3 Default Copy Options menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Number of Copies
Type the number of
copies. The factory
default setting is 1.
Set the default number of copies for a copy job.
Number of Sides
1 (default)
Set the default number of sides for copies.
2
Staple/Collate
Staple
None (default)
One left angled
Collate
Off
Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies.
When you make multiple copies of a document,
collating places the pages in the correct order, one set
at a time, rather than placing all copies of each page
next to each other.
On (default)
Output Bin
Output Bin <X>
Select the default output bin, if applicable, for copies.
Edge-To-Edge
Normal (recommended)
(default)
If the original document is printed close to the edges,
use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows that
can appear along the edges. Combine this feature with
the Reduce/Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire
page is printed on the copies.
Edge-To-Edge Output
22
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Default Fax Options
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-4 Fax Send menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Resolution
Values
Description
Standard (100x200dpi)
(default)
Use this feature to set the resolution for sent
documents. Higher resolution images have more dots
per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower
resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show
less detail, but the file size is smaller.
Fine (200x200dpi)
Superfine (300x300dpi)
Fax Header
Prepend (default)
Use this feature to select the position of the fax header
on the page.
Overlay
Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax
content and move the fax content down on the page.
Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of
the fax content without moving the fax content down.
Using this option could prevent a single-page fax from
flowing onto another page.
Table 2-5 Fax Receive menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Forward Fax
Fax Forwarding
To forward received faxes to another fax device, select Fax
Forwarding and Custom. When you select this menu item for the fist
time, you are prompted to set up a PIN. You will be prompted to enter
that PIN every time you try to use this menu. This is the same PIN
that is used to access the Fax Printing menu.
Change PIN
Stamp Received Faxes
Enabled
Use this option to add the date, time, sender’s phone number, and
page number to each page of the faxes that this device receives.
Disabled (default)
Fit to Page
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Use this feature to shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If it this
feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across
multiple pages.
Fax Paper Tray
Select from the list of trays.
Output Bin
Select from the list of output bins. Select the default output bin, if applicable, to use for faxes.
ENWW
Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to
use for incoming faxes.
Use the Administration menu
23
Default E-mail Options
Use this menu to set default options for e-mails that are sent from the device.
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Menu item
Values
Description
Document File Type
PDF (default)
Choose the file format for the e-mail.
JPEG
TIFF
M-TIFF
Output Quality
High (large file)
Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the
output file.
Medium (default)
Low (small file)
Resolution
75 DPI
Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to
create smaller files.
150 DPI (default)
200 DPI
300 DPI
Color/Black
Color scan (default)
Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.
Black/white scan
TIFF Version
TIFF 6.0 (default)
Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving
scanned files.
TIFF (Post 6.0)
24
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Default Send to Folder Options
Use this menu to set default options for scan jobs sent to the computer.
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Menu item
Values
Description
Color/Black
Color scan
Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.
Black/white scan (default)
Document File Type
PDF (default)
Choose the file format for the file.
M-TIFF
TIFF
JPEG
TIFF version
TIFF 6.0 (default)
Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving
scanned files.
TIFF (post 6.0)
Output Quality
High (large file)
Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the
output file.
Medium (default)
Low (small file)
Resolution
75 DPI
Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to
create smaller files.
150 DPI (default)
200 DPI
300 DPI
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
25
Default Print Options
Use this menu to set default options for jobs that are sent from a computer.
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-6 Default Print Options menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Copies Per Job
Type a value.
Use this feature to set the default number of copies for
print jobs.
Default Paper Size
(List of supported sizes.)
Choose a paper size.
Millimeters
Configure the default paper size that is used when the
user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.
Default Custom Paper
Size
Sub-menu item
Unit of measure
Inches
X Dimension
Configure the width measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size.
Y Dimension
Configure the height measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size.
Output Bin
<Binname>
Select the default output bin for print jobs.
Print Sides
1-sided (default)
Use this feature to select whether print jobs should be
single-sided or double-sided by default.
2-sided
2-Sided Format
Book style
Flip style
26
Chapter 2 Control panel
Use this feature to configure the default style for 2sided print jobs. If Book style is selected, the back side
of the page is printed the right way up. This option is
for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If Flip
style is selected, the back side of the page is printed
upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound
along the top edge.
ENWW
Time/Scheduling menu
Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Date/Time
Date Format
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
YYYY/MMM/DD
(default)
Use this feature to set the current date and
time, and to set the date format and time
format that are used to time-stamp outgoing
faxes.
MMM/DD/YYYY
DD/MMM/YYYY
Date
Month
Day
Year
Time Format
12 hour (AM/PM)
(default)
24 hour
Time
Hour
Minute
AM
PM
Sleep Delay
1 minute
5 minutes (default)
Use this feature to select the time interval that
the device should remain inactive before
entering Sleep Mode.
10 minutes
30 minutes
45 minutes
1 hour (60 minutes)
90 minutes
2 hours
Wake Time
Monday
Off (default)
Tuesday
Custom
Wednesday
Thursday
Select Custom to set a wake time for each
day of the week. The device exits sleep mode
according to this schedule. Using a sleep
schedule helps conserve energy and
prepares the device for use so that users do
not have to wait for it to warm up.
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
27
Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Fax Printing
Fax Printing Mode
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Store all received
faxes
If you have concerns about the security of
private faxes, use this feature to store faxes
rather than having them automatically print by
creating a printing schedule.
Print all received
faxes
Use Fax Printing
Schedule
Change PIN
28
Chapter 2 Control panel
For the fax printing schedule, the control
panel prompts you to select days and times
to print faxes.
Select Change PIN to change the PIN
number that users must provide to print faxes.
ENWW
Management menu
Use this menu to set up global device-management options.
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-8 Management menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Stored Job Management
Quick Copy Job Storage
Limit
Select the maximum
number of jobs to store
Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are
stored on the device.
Quick Copy Job Held
Timeout
1 Hour
4 Hours
1 Day
1 Week
Sleep mode
Disable
Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings
for this device.
Use Sleep Delay (default)
Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep
mode after the delay that is specified in the Time/
Scheduling menu.
Manage Supplies
Supply Low/Order
Threshold
Select a value in the
range.
Replace Black Cartridge
Stop at low
Use this menu to carry out administrative supply
management tasks such as changing the threshold
when supplies should be ordered.
Stop at out
Override at out (default)
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
29
Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu contains the sub-menus shown:
●
Networking and I/O menu
●
Fax Setup menu
●
E-mail Setup menu
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Networking and I/O
Table 2-9 Networking and I/O
Menu item
Sub-menu item
I/O Timeout
Parallel Input
NOTE: This item
appears only if an EIO
accessory is installed.
High Speed
Values
Description
Select a value in the
range. The factory default
setting is 15 seconds.
I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job
fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for
a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how
long the device will wait before it reports that the job
has failed.
No
Use the High Speed setting to configure the speed that
the parallel port uses to communicate with the host.
Yes (default)
Advanced Functions
Enabled (default)
Use the Advanced Functions setting to enable or
disable bidirectional parallel communication.
Disabled
Embedded Jetdirect
See Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus on page 30 for the list of options.
EIO <X> Jetdirect
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus
Menu item
Sub-menu item
TCP/IP
Enable
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.
Host Name
30
Chapter 2 Control panel
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to
identify the device. This name is listed on the
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the
LAN hardware (MAC) address.
ENWW
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
IPV4 Settings
Config Method
Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be
configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.
Bootp: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a BootP server.
DHCP: Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4
server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP
Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set
DHCP lease options.
Auto IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned
automatically.
Manual: Use the Manual Settings menu to configure
TCP/IPv4 parameters.
DHCP Release
This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.
Yes: The current DHCP lease and the leased IP
address are released.
DHCP Renew
This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The print server does not request to renew
the DHCP lease.
Yes: The print server requests to renew the current
DHCP lease.
Manual Settings
(Available only if Config Method is set to Manual)
Configure parameters directly from the printer control
panel:
IP Address: The unique IP address of the printer
(n.n.n.n), where n is a value from 0 to 255.
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask for the printer
(m.m.m.m), where m is a value from 0 to 255.
Syslog Server: The IP address of the syslog server
used to receive and log syslog messages.
Default Gateway: The IP address of the gateway or
router used for communications with other networks.
Idle Timeout: The time period, in seconds, after which
an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is
270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
31
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
Default IP
Specify the IP address to default to when the print
server is unable to obtain an IP address from the
network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for
example, when manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent
with older HP Jetdirect devices.
IPV6 Settings
Primary DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS
Server.
Secondary DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.
Enable
Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the
print server.
Off (default): IPv6 is disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Address
Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address.
Manual Settings: Use the Manual Settings menu to
enable and manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address.
DHCPV6 Policy
Router Specified: The stateful auto-configuration
method to be used by the print server is determined by
a router. The router specifies whether the print server
obtains its address, its configuration information, or
both from a DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print
server should attempt to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether or not a router is available, the print
server always attempts to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
Primary DNS
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary
DNS server that the print server should use.
Manual Settings
Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the
print server.
Enable: Select this item and choose On to enable
manual configuration, or Off to disable manual
configuration.
Address: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit
IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal
syntax.
32
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Proxy Server
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded
applications in the device. A proxy server is typically
used by network clients for Internet access. It caches
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security,
for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to
255 octets.
For some networks, you may need to contact your
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy
server address.
IPX/SPX
Proxy Port
Type the port number used by the proxy server for
client support. The port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be
a value from 0 to 65535.
Enable
Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
Frame Type
Selects the frame-type setting for your network.
Auto: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to
the first one detected.
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frametype selections for Ethernet networks.
AppleTalk
Enable
Off (default): Disable the AppleTalk protocol.
On: Enable the AppleTalk protocol.
DLC/LLC
Enable
Off (default): Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.
On: Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
33
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Security
Print Sec Page
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security
settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.
No (default): A security settings page is not printed.
Secure Web
For configuration management, specify whether the
embedded Web server will accept communications
using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and
HTTPS.
HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The
print server will appear as a secure site.
HTTP/HTTPS optional: Access using either HTTP or
HTTPS is permitted.
IPsec or Firewall
Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server.
Keep: IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as
currently configured.
Disable: IPsec/Firewall operation on the print server is
disabled.
Reset Security
Specify whether the current security settings on the
print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
No*: The current security settings are maintained.
Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.
Diagnostics
Embedded Test
This menu provides tests to help diagnose network
hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault
is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded
test to check hardware and communication paths on
the print server. After you select and enable a test and
set the execution time, you must select Execute to
initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs
continuously until either the device is turned off, or an
error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.
LAN HW Test
CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase
your TCP/IP configuration.
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal
loopback test will send and receive packets only on the
internal network hardware. There are no external
transmissions on your network.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
HTTP Test
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving
predefined pages from the device, and tests the
embedded Web server.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
34
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
SNMP Test
This test checks operation of SNMP communications
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
Select All Tests
Use this item to select all available embedded tests.
Select Yesto choose all tests. Select No to select
individual tests.
Data Path Test
This test helps to identify data path and corruption
problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device.
It sends a predefined PS file to the device, However,
the test is paperless; the file will not print.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
Execution Time [H]
Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that
an embedded test will be run. You can select a value
from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs
indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path
tests is printed after the tests have completed.
Execute
No*: Do not initiate the selected tests.
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.
Ping Test
This test is used to check network communications.
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network
host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a
ping test, set the following items:
Dest Type
Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6
node.
Dest IP
IPV4: Type the IPv4 address.
IPV6 : Type the IPv6 address.
ENWW
Packet Size
Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to
the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the
maximum is 2048.
Timeout
Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a
response from the remote host. The default is 1 and
the maximum is 100.
Count
Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this
test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test
to run continuously, select 0.
Print Results
If the ping test was not set for continuous operation,
you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to
print results. If you select No (default), results are not
printed.
Execute
Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to
initiate the test, or No to not run the test.
Use the Administration menu
35
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Ping Results
36
Chapter 2 Control panel
Values and Description
Use this item to view the ping test status and results
using the control panel display. You can select the
following items:
Packets Sent
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the
remote host since the most recent test was initiated or
completed.
Packets Received
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from
the remote host since the most recent test was initiated
or completed.
Percent Lost
Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent
with no response from the remote host since the most
recent test was initiated or completed.
RTT Min
Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.
RTT Max
Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.
RTT Average
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and
response.
Ping In Progress
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates
a test in progress, and No indicates that a test
completed or was not run.
Refresh
When viewing the ping test results, this item updates
the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to
update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the
menu times out or you manually return to the main
menu.
ENWW
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Link Speed
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values and Description
The link speed and communication mode of the print
server must match the network. The available settings
depend on the device and installed print server. Select
one of the following link configuration settings:
CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network
communications with the print server and network
device might be lost.
Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation
to configure itself with the highest link speed and
communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails,
either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on
the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A
1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)
10T Half: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
10T Full: 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.
100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100TX Auto: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link
speed of 100 Mbps.
1000TX Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
Print Protocols
ENWW
Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration
of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare,
AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.
Use the Administration menu
37
Fax Setup
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Required Settings
Location
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
(Countries/regions
listed)
Configure the settings that are legally
required for outgoing faxes.
Disabled
Use this feature to enable or disable PC Fax
Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send
faxes through the device from their
computers if they have the correct driver
installed.
Date/Time
Fax Header
Information
Phone Number
Company Name
PC Fax Send
Enabled (default)
38
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Fax Send Settings
Fax Dial Volume
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Off
Use this feature to set the volume of the tones
that you hear while the device dials the fax
number.
Medium (default)
High
Error Correction
Mode
Enabled (default)
Disabled
JBIG Compression
Disabled
Enabled (default)
When Error Correction Mode is enabled and
an error occurs during fax transmission, the
device sends or receives the error portion
again.
The JBIG Compression reduces faxtransmission time, which can result in lower
phone charges. However, using JBIG
Compression sometimes causes
compatibility problems with older fax
machines. If this occurs, turn off the JBIG
Compression.
Maximum Baud Rate
Select a value from
the list.
Use this feature to set the maximum baud
rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as
a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax
problems.
Dialing Mode
Tone (default)
Select whether the device should use tone or
pulse dialing.
Pulse
Redial On Busy
The range is between Type the number of times the device should
0 and 9. The factory attempt to redial if the line is busy.
default is 3 times.
Redial On No Answer
Never (default)
Once
Twice
NOTE: Twice is available in locations other
than the United States and Canada.
Redial Interval
The range is between Use this feature to specify the number of
1 and 5 minutes. The minutes between dialing attempts if the
factory default is 5
recipient number is busy or not answering.
minutes.
Detect Dial Tone
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Dialing Prefix
Off (default)
Custom
Billing Codes
Off (default)
Custom
Minimum Length
ENWW
Use this feature to specify the number of
times the device should attempt to dial if the
recipient fax number does not answer.
Use this feature to specify whether the device
should check for a dial tone before sending a
fax.
Use this feature to specify a prefix number
that must be dialed when sending faxes from
the device.
When billing codes are enabled, a prompt
appears that asks the user to enter the billing
code for an outgoing fax.
The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The default is 1 digit.
Use the Administration menu
39
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Fax Receive Settings
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Rings To Answer
The range varies by
location. The factory
default is 2 rings.
Use this feature to specify the number of rings
that must occur before the fax modem
answers.
Ring Interval
Default (default)
Use this feature to control the time between
rings for incoming faxes.
Custom
Ringer Volume
Off
Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.
Low (default)
High
Blocked Fax
Numbers
Add Blocked
Numbers
Type the fax number
to add.
Remove Blocked
Numbers
Select a fax number
to remove.
Clear All Blocked
Numbers
No (default)
Use this feature to add or delete numbers
from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list
can contain up to 30 numbers. When the
device receives a call from one of the blocked
fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It
also logs the blocked fax in the activity log
along with job-accounting information.
Yes
40
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
E-mail Setup
Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.
NOTE: To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information,
see Use the embedded Web server on page 145.
Table 2-12 E-mail Setup menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Address Validation
On (default)
This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type
an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and
a ".".
Off
Find Send Gateways
SMTP Gateway
Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to
send e-mail.
Enter a value.
Test Send Gateway
Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send email from the device.
Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.
Send Setup menu
Table 2-13 Send Setup menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Replicate MFP
Enter a value (IP Address).
Copy the local Send settings from one device to another.
Allow Transfer to New DSS
Use this feature to allow the transfer of the device from one HP Digital
Sending Software (DSS) server to another.
HP DSS is a software package that handles digital sending tasks such
as faxing, e-mail, and sending a scanned document to a network
folder.
Allow Use of Digital Send Service
ENWW
This feature allows you to configure the device for use with an
HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server.
Use the Administration menu
41
Device Behavior menu
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Language
Select the language
from the list.
Use this feature to select a different language
for control-panel messages. When you select
a new language, the keyboard layout might
also change.
Key Press Sound
On (default)
Use this feature to specify whether you hear
a sound when you touch the screen or press
buttons on the control panel.
Off
Inactivity Timeout
Warning/Error
Behavior
Clearable Warnings
Type a value
between 10 and 300
seconds. The factory
default is 60
seconds.
Use this feature to specify the amount of time
that elapses between any activity on the
control panel and the device resetting to the
default settings.
On
Use this feature to set the amount of time that
a clearable warning appears on the control
panel.
Job (default)
Continuable Events
Auto continue (10
seconds) (default)
Use this option to configure the device
behavior when the device encounters certain
errors.
Touch OK to
continue
Jam Recovery
Auto (default)
Use this feature to configure how the device
handles pages that are lost during a jam.
On
Off
42
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Tray Behavior
Use Requested Tray
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Exclusively (default)
Use this feature to control how the device
handles jobs that have specified a specific
input tray.
First
Manually Feed
Prompt
Always (default)
Unless Loaded
PS Defer Media
Enabled (default)
Use this feature to indicate whether a prompt
should appear when the type or size for a job
does not match the specified tray and the
device pulls from the multipurpose tray
instead.
Use this feature to choose either the
PostScript (PS) or HP paper-handling model.
Disabled
Use Another Tray
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Size/Type Prompt
Display
Do not display
(default)
Duplex Blank Pages
Auto (default)
Use this feature to turn on or off the controlpanel prompt to select another tray when the
specified tray is empty.
Use this feature to control whether the tray
configuration message appears whenever a
tray is opened or closed.
Use this feature to control how the device
handles two-sided jobs (duplexing).
Yes
Image Rotation
Standard (default)
Alternate
This option is available if the device does not
have a finisher that requests rotation. Image
Rotation allows users to put paper in the input
tray using the same orientation, regardless of
whether a finisher is installed.
Select the Standard setting to match the
loading orientation of other devices that have
a finisher.
Select the Alternate setting to use a different
loading orientation that might work better with
preprinted forms that are used on legacy
products.
Stapler/Stacker
NOTE: This item
appears only if a
stapler/stacker is
installed.
ENWW
Staple
None
Use this feature to set stapling characteristics
for the device.
One left angled
Staples Out
Continue (default)
Stop
Use the Administration menu
43
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
General Copy
Behavior
Scan Ahead
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Enabled (default)
Use this feature to turn on no-wait scanning.
With Scan Ahead enabled, the pages in the
original document are scanned to disk and
held until the device becomes available.
Disabled
Auto Print Interrupt
Enabled
Disabled
When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can
interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple
copies.
The copy job is inserted into the print queue
at the end of one copy of the print job. After
the copy job is complete, the device
continues printing the remaining copies of the
print job.
Copy Interrupt
General Print
Behavior
Enabled
Disabled
When this feature is enabled, a copy job that
is currently printing can be interrupted when
a new copy job is started. You are prompted
to confirm that you want to interrupt the
current job.
Default Paper Size
Select from the list of
paper sizes.
Use this feature to configure the default paper
size used for print jobs.
Override A4/Letter
No
Use this feature to print on letter-size paper
when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper
is loaded in the device (or to print on A4 paper
when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size
paper is loaded). This option will also override
A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3size paper.
Yes (default)
Manual Feed
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Courier Font
Regular (default)
When this feature is enabled, the user can
select manual feed from the control panel as
the paper source for a job.
Use this feature to select which version of the
Courier font you want to use.
Dark
Wide A4
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Print PS Errors
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Print PDF Errors
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Personality
Auto (default)
Use this feature to change the printable area
of A4-size paper. If you enable this option,
eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on
a single line of A4 paper.
Use this feature to select whether a
PostScript (PS) error page is printed when
the device encounters a PS error.
Use this feature to select whether a PDF error
page is printed when the device encounters
a PDF error.
Select the printer language that the device
should use.
PCL
PDF
PS
44
Chapter 2 Control panel
Normally you should not change the
language. If you change the setting to a
specific language, the device does not
automatically switch from one language to
another unless specific software commands
are sent to the device.
ENWW
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
PCL
Form Length
Type a value
between 5 and 128
lines. The factory
default is 60 lines.
PCL is a set of printer commands that
Hewlett-Packard developed to provide
access to printer features.
Orientation
Portrait (default)
Landscape
Select the orientation that is most often used
print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge is
at the top or select Landscape if the long edge
is at the top.
Font Source
Select the source
from the list.
Use this feature to select the font source for
the user-defined soft default font.
Font Number
Type the font
number. The range is
between 0 and 999.
The factory default is
0.
Use this feature to specify the font number for
the user-soft default font using the source that
is specified in the Font Source menu item.
The device assigns a number to each font
and lists it on the PCL font list (available from
the Administration menu).
Font Pitch
Type a value
between 0.44 and
99.99. The factory
default is 10.00.
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a
contour font, then use this feature to select a
default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).
Font Point Size
Type a value
between 4.00 and
999.75. The factory
default is 12.00.
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a
contour font, then use this feature to select a
default point size (for a proportional-spaced
font).
Symbol Set
PC-8 (default)
Append CR to LF
No (default)
Use this feature to select any one of several
available symbol sets from the control panel.
(50 additional symbol A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the
sets from which to
characters in a font.
choose)
Yes
Suppress Blank
Pages
No (default)
Yes
Media Source
Mapping
Standard (default)
Classic
ENWW
Use this feature to configure whether a
carriage return (CR) is appended to each line
feed (LF) encountered in backwardscompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job
control).
This option is for users who are generating
their own PCL, which could include extra form
feeds that would cause blank pages to be
printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are
ignored if the page is blank.
Use this feature to select and maintain input
trays by number when you are not using the
device driver, or when the software program
has no option for tray selection.
Use the Administration menu
45
Print Quality menu
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-15 Print Quality menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Set Registration
Source
All trays
Use Set Registration to shift the margin alignment to
center the image on the page from top to bottom and
from left to right. You can also align the image on the
front with the image printed on the back.
Tray <X>: <contents>
(choose a tray)
Select the source input tray for printing the Set
Registration page.
Fuser Modes
Optimize
Test Page
Print (button)
Print a test page for setting the registration. Follow the
instructions that are printed on the page to adjust each
tray.
Adjust Tray <X>
Shift from -20 to 20 along
the X or Y axes. 0 is the
default.
Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.
<Paper Type>
When it creates an image, the device scans across the
page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to
bottom into the device.
Configure the fuser mode associated with each media
type.
Restore Modes
Restore (button)
Restore the fuser modes to the default settings.
High Transfer
Normal (default)
Optimize print engine parameters to get the best
possible print quality for all jobs in addition to specifying
media type.
Increased
More Separation 1
Off (default)
On
More Separation 2
Off (default)
On
Line Detail
Off (default)
On
Fuser Temp
Normal
Reduced
Restore Optimize
Resolution
Restore (button)
Reset all the Optimize parameters to the factory default
settings.
300
Use this feature to select the print resolution.
600
FastRes 1200 (default)
ProRes 1200
46
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-15 Print Quality menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
REt
Values
Description
Off
Enable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt),
which produces print output with smooth angles,
curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including
FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
Light
Medium (default)
Dark
Economode
Enabled
Toner Density
Calibration/Cleaning
Auto Cleaning
Disabled (default)
When Economode is enabled, the device prints with a
reduced amount of toner per page; however, the print
quality of the page is slightly reduced.
Choose from a range of 1
to 5. 3 is the default.
Lighten or darken the print on the page. 1 is the lightest
and 5 is the darkest.
Enabled
When auto-cleaning is on, the device prints a cleaning
page when the page count reaches the value that is set
in Cleaning Interval.
Disabled (default)
Cleaning Interval
1000 (default)
2000
Set the interval when the cleaning page should be
printed. The interval is measured by the number of
pages printed.
5000
10000
20000
Auto Cleaning Size
Letter
Select the size of paper used for the cleaning page.
A4
Create Cleaning Page
Create (button)
Generate a page for cleaning excess toner off the
pressure roller in the fuser. The page has instructions
that guide you through the cleaning process.
NOTE: Not available when an automatic duplexer is
installed.
Process Cleaning Page
Process (button)
Process the cleaning page that was created by using
the Create Cleaning Page menu item. The process
takes up to 2.5 minutes.
If an automatic duplexer is installed, this item creates
the cleaning page and processes it.
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
47
Troubleshooting menu
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Event Log
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Print (button)
Use this feature to show the 50 most recent
events in the event log.
Touch Print to print the full event log.
Calibrate Scanner
Calibrate
Use this feature to compensate for offsets in
the scanner imaging system (carriage head)
for ADF and flatbed scans.
You might need to calibrate the scanner if it
is not capturing the correct sections of
scanned documents.
Fax T.30 Trace
T.30 Report
When to Print Report
Never auto print
Print after any fax job
Use this feature to print or configure the fax
T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that
specifies handshaking, protocols, and error
correction between fax machines.
Print after fax send
jobs
Print after any fax
error
Print after send
errors only
Print after receive
errors only
Fax Transmit Signal
Loss
A value between 0
and 30.
Use this feature to set loss levels to
compensate for phone line signal loss. You
should not modify this setting unless
requested to do so by an HP service
representative because it could cause the fax
to stop functioning.
Fax V.34
Normal (default)
Use this feature to disable V.34 modulations
if several fax failures have occurred or if
phone line conditions require it.
Off
Fax Speaker Mode
Normal (default)
Diagnostic
Paper Path Sensors
48
Chapter 2 Control panel
This feature can be used by a technician to
evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening
to the sounds of fax modulations. The factory
default setting is Normal.
Initiate a test of the paper path sensors.
ENWW
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Paper Path Test
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Test Page
Print (button)
Generate a test page for testing paper
handling features. You can define the path
that is used for the test in order to test specific
paper paths.
Source
All trays
Specify whether the test page will be printed
from all trays or from a specific tray.
Tray 1
Tray 2
(Additional trays are
shown, if applicable.)
Destination
A list of output bins
appears.
Select the output option for the test page. You
can choose to send the test page to all output
bins or only to a specific bin.
Duplex
Off (default)
Select whether the duplexer should be
included in the Paper Path test.
On
Copies
1 (default)
10
Select how many pages should be sent from
the specified source as part of the Paper Path
test.
50
100
500
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
49
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Finishing Paper Path
Test
Stapling
Finishing Options
Choose from a list of
available options.
Test paper handling features for the finisher.
Select the option that you want to test.
Media Size
Letter
Select the paper size for the Finishing Paper
Path Test.
Legal
A4
Executive (JIS)
8.5 x 13
Media Type
Select the paper type for the Finishing Paper
Path Test.
Copies
Select the number of copies to include in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
Duplex
Off
On
Stacking
Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test. The default
setting is 2 copies.
Test Page
Print (button)
Print a test page to use for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
Media Size
Letter
Select the options that you want to use to test
the stacker.
Legal
A4
Executive (JIS)
8.5 x 13
Media Type
Select from a list of
types.
Copies
Duplex
Select the type of media to use for the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
Select the number of copies to include in the
Finishing Paper Path Test. The default
setting is 2 copies.
Off
Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
On
Test Page
50
Print (button)
Print a test page to use for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
Manual Sensor Test
Test the device sensors and switches for
correct operation. Each sensor is displayed
on the control-panel screen, along with its
status. Manually trip each sensor and watch
for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop
button to abort the test.
Component Test
Exercise individual parts independently to
isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start
the test, select one of the components. The
test will run the number of times specified by
the Repeat option. You might be prompted to
remove parts from the device during the test.
Press the Stop button to abort the test.
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu item
Print/Stop Test
Scanner Tests
Control Panel
Sub-menu item
Values
Description
Continuous value
from 0 to 60,000
milliseconds. The
default is 0
milliseconds.
Isolate faults by stopping the device during
the print cycle and observing where in the
process the image degrades. To run the test,
specify a stop time. The next job that is sent
to the device will stop at the specified time in
the process.
This menu item is used by a service
technician to diagnose potential problems
with the device scanner.
LEDs
Display
Use this feature to make sure the
components of the control panel are
functioning correctly.
Buttons
Touchscreen
ENWW
Use the Administration menu
51
Resets menu
Table 2-17 Resets menu
Menu item
Values
Description
Clear Local Address Book
Clear (button)
Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that
are stored on the device.
Clear Fax Activity Log
Yes
Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.
No (default)
Restore Factory Telecom Setting
Restore (button)
Use this option to restore the telephone-related settings that are in
the Initial Setup menu to factory default values.
Restore Factory Settings
Restore (button)
Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Maintenance Message
Clear (button)
Clear the Order Maintenance Kit and Replace Maintenance Kit
warning messages.
Clear Document Feeder
Message
Clear (button)
Use this feature to clear the Order Document Feeder Kit and Replace
Document Feeder Kit warning messages.
Reset Supplies
New Maintenance Kit (Yes/No)
Notify the device that a new maintenance kit or document feeder kit
has been installed.
New Document Feeder Kit (Yes/
No)
Service menu
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized
service personnel.
52
Chapter 2 Control panel
ENWW
3
ENWW
I/O Configuration
●
USB configuration
●
Network configuration
53
USB configuration
This device supports a USB 2.0 connection. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable for printing.
Figure 3-1 USB connection
54
1
USB connector
2
USB port (type B)
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration
ENWW
Network configuration
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the device. You can configure these
parameters in the following locations:
●
Installation software
●
Device control panel
●
Embedded Web server
●
Management software (HP Web Jetadmin or HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh)
NOTE: For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Use the embedded Web
server on page 145
For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect Print
Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is
installed.
This section contains the following information about configuring network parameters:
●
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters
●
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters
●
Disable network protocols (optional)
●
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters
If your network doesn't provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or another
method, you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the
network:
●
IP address (4 bytes)
●
Subnet mask (4 bytes)
●
Default gateway (4 bytes)
Set an IP address
You can view the current IP address of the device from the control-panel Home screen by touching
Network Address.
Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually.
ENWW
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
Network configuration
55
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings.
7.
Touch Config Method.
8.
Touch Manual.
9.
Touch Save.
10. Touch Manual Settings.
11. Touch IP Address.
12. Touch the IP Address text box.
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address.
14. Touch OK.
15. Touch Save.
Set the subnet mask
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings.
7.
Touch Config Method.
8.
Touch Manual.
9.
Touch Save.
10. Touch Manual Settings.
11. Touch Subnet Mask.
12. Touch the Subnet Mask text box.
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask.
14. Touch OK.
15. Touch Save.
Set the default gateway
56
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration
ENWW
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings.
7.
Touch Config Method.
8.
Touch Manual.
9.
Touch Save.
10. Touch Manual Settings.
11. Touch Default Gateway.
12. Touch the Default Gateway text box.
13. Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway.
14. Touch OK.
15. Touch Save.
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters
For information about configuring the device for a TCP/IPv6 network, see the HP Jetdirect Embedded
Print Server Administrator's Guide.
Disable network protocols (optional)
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the
following benefits:
●
It decreases device-generated network traffic.
●
It prevents unauthorized users from printing to the device.
●
It provides only pertinent information on the configuration page.
●
It allows the device control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages.
Disable IPX/SPX
NOTE: Do not disable this protocol in Windows-based systems that print to the printer through IPX/
SPX.
ENWW
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
5.
Touch IPX/SPX.
6.
Touch Enable.
7.
Touch Off.
8.
Touch Save.
Network configuration
57
Disable AppleTalk
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
5.
Touch AppleTalk.
6.
Touch Enable.
7.
Touch Off.
8.
Touch Save.
Disable DLC/LLC
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch Networking and I/O.
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect.
5.
Touch DLC/LLC.
6.
Touch Enable.
7.
Touch Off.
8.
Touch Save.
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in the EIO slot. These cards support multiple
network protocols and operating systems. HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by
allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location. HP Jetdirect print servers also
support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which provides remote printer management
and troubleshooting through the HP Web Jetadmin software.
NOTE: Configure the card through the control panel, the printer installation software, or HP Web
Jetadmin. Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for more information.
58
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration
ENWW
4
ENWW
Media and trays
●
General guidelines for media
●
Considerations for special media
●
Select print media
●
Printing and paper-storage environment
●
Load media into the input trays
●
Load documents for faxing, copying, and scanning
●
Print on rotated media
●
Print full-bleed images
●
Print on custom-size media
●
Control print jobs
59
General guidelines for media
Hewlett-Packard Company recommends testing any paper before buying it in large quantities.
CAUTION: Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the HP LaserJet
Printer Family Print Media Guide can cause problems that require service. This service is not covered
by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements. To download a copy of the guide, go to
www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide.
Paper to avoid
The product can handle many types of paper. Using paper that does not meet specifications will cause
lower print quality and increase the chance of jams.
●
Do not use paper that is too rough. Use paper with a tested smoothness rating of 100–250 Sheffield.
●
Do not use paper, other than standard 3-hole punched paper, that contains cutouts or perforations.
●
Do not use multipart forms.
●
Do not use paper that has already been printed on, or that has been fed through a photocopier.
●
Do not use paper that contains a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
●
Do not use heavily embossed or raised-letterhead papers.
●
Do not use papers that have heavily textured surfaces.
●
Do not use offset powders or other materials that prevent printed forms from sticking together.
●
Do not use paper that has a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.
Paper that can damage the device
In rare circumstances, paper can damage the device. The following paper must be avoided to prevent
possible damage to the device:
●
Do not use paper with staples attached.
●
Do not use transparencies, labels, or photo or glossy paper designed for Inkjet printers or other
low temperature printers. Use only media that is specified for use with HP LaserJet printers.
●
Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when
exposed to the temperature of the fuser.
●
Do not use paper that is embossed or coated, or any media that is not designed to withstand the
fusing temperature of the device. Do not use letterhead paper or preprinted forms that are made
with dyes or inks that cannot withstand the heat of the fuser.
To order HP LaserJet printing supplies, contact your dealer.
60
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
General media specifications
For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet devices, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide (available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide) .
ENWW
Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Caliper
0.094 to 0.18 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils)
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 in)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200°
C (392°F) for 0.1 second.
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
General guidelines for media
61
Considerations for special media
Table 4-1 Media considerations
Media type
Considerations
Envelopes
●
Use only tray 1 to print envelopes. Choose envelopes in the printer driver (see Select the correct
printer driver on page 9).
●
Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl, and should not
contain air.
●
Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must
use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the device. The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or even jams and might even damage the fuser.
●
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 in) from the edges of the
envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet.
●
The device might print at a slower speed when printing envelopes. In addition, printing
performance depends on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes
before purchasing a large quantity.
●
Envelopes with double-side seam-construction are more likely to wrinkle. If you print envelopes
with double-side seams, use only envelopes in which the seam extends all the way to the corner
of the envelope.
WARNING! Never use envelopes that contain coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other
synthetic materials. These items can emit noxious fumes.
62
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Table 4-1 Media considerations (continued)
Media type
Considerations
Labels
●
Print labels from tray 1.
●
Use only labels specified for use with HP LaserJet printers.
●
Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 in) of curl in any direction.
●
Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
●
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
●
Remove label sheets from the output bin as they are printed to prevent them from sticking
together.
●
Do not feed a sheet of labels through the device more than once. The adhesive backing is
designed for one pass through the device.
●
Do not print on both sides of labels.
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can damage the device.
If a sheet of labels becomes jammed in the device, see Clear jams on page 183.
NOTE:
Transparencies
●
Print transparencies from tray 1.
●
Use only transparencies specified for use with HP LaserJet printers
●
Remove transparencies from the output bin as they are printed to prevent them from sticking
together.
●
Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the device.
NOTE:
Card stock and heavy
media
Choose labels in the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
Choose transparencies in the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
You can print many types of card stock from the input tray, including index cards and postcards. Some
card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited for feeding through a
laser printer.
●
Use tray 1 for card stock (164 g/m2 to 199 g/m2; 43- to 53-lb cover).
●
Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 inch) of curl.
●
Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Set margins at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) away from the edges.
CAUTION: In general, do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended
for this device. Doing so can cause misfeeds, jams, reduced print quality, and excessive mechanical
wear. However, some heavier media, such as HP Cover Stock, can be used safely.
NOTE:
ENWW
Select Cardstock (164 g/m2 to 199 g/m2; 43- to 53-lb cover) in the printer driver.
Considerations for special media
63
Table 4-1 Media considerations (continued)
Media type
Considerations
Letterhead and
preprinted forms
Letterhead is premium paper that often has a watermark, sometimes uses cotton fiber, and is available
in a wide range of colors and finishes with matching envelopes. Preprinted forms can be made of a
broad spectrum of paper types ranging from recycled to premium.
Many manufacturers now design these grades of paper with properties optimized for laser printing
and advertise the paper as laser compatible or laser guaranteed. Some of the rougher surface
finishes, such as cockle, laid, or linen, might require the special fuser modes that are available on
some printer models to achieve adequate toner adhesion.
NOTE: Some page-to-page variation is normal when printing with laser printers. This variation
cannot be observed when printing on plain paper. However, this variation is obvious when printing on
preprinted forms because the lines and boxes are already placed on the page.
To avoid problems when using preprinted forms, embossed paper, and letterhead, observe the
following guidelines:
●
Use preprinted forms and letterhead paper that have been printed by offset lithography or
engraving.
●
When the form is preprinted, be careful not to change the moisture content of the paper, and do
not use materials that change the paper's electrical or handling properties. Seal the forms in
moisture-proof wrap to prevent moisture changes during storage.
NOTE: To print a single-page cover letter on letterhead, followed by a multiple-page document, feed
the letterhead face up in tray 1, and load the standard paper into one of the other trays. The device
automatically prints from tray 1 first.
Vellum
Vellum is special lightweight paper similar to parchment.
●
Print vellum from tray 1 only.
●
Do not print on both sides of vellum.
NOTE: From the printer driver, set the type of paper for tray 1 to vellum or light, and select the
media by type.
Colored paper
Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
HP LaserJet Tough
paper
●
Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper. HP products are designed to work together for optimum
printing results.
●
Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper by the edges. Oils from your fingers can cause print-quality
problems.
Recycled paper
64
Chapter 4 Media and trays
This device supports recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard
paper. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Hewlett-Packard recommends that
recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood.
ENWW
Select the correct fuser mode
The device automatically adjusts the fuser mode based on the media type to which the tray is set. For
example, heavy paper, such as card stock, might need a higher fuser-mode setting in order to make the
toner adhere better to the page, but transparencies need a lower fuser-mode setting to avoid damage
to the device. The default setting generally provides the best performance for most print-media types.
The fuser mode can be changed only if the media type has been set for the tray that you are using. See
Control print jobs on page 86. After the media type has been set for the tray, then the fuser mode for
that type can be changed on the Administration menu in the Print Quality submenu at the device control
panel. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
NOTE: Using the High 1 or High 2 fuser mode setting improves the ability of the toner to adhere to
paper, but it might cause other problems, such as excessive curl. The device might print at a slower
speed when the fuser mode is set to High 1 or High 2. The table below describes the ideal fuser mode
setting for supported media types.
Media type
Fuser mode setting
Plain
Normal
Preprinted
Normal
Letterhead
Normal
Transparency
Low 3
Prepunched
Normal
Labels
Normal
Bond
Normal
Recycled
Normal
Color
Normal
Light
Low 1
Card stock
Normal
Rough
High 1
Envelope
Envelope
To reset the fuser modes to the default settings, touch the Administration menu at the device control
panel. Touch Print Quality, touch Fuser Modes, and then touch Restore Modes.
ENWW
Considerations for special media
65
Select print media
This device accepts a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper, including up to 100% recycled fiber
content paper; envelopes; labels; transparencies; and custom-size paper. Properties such as weight,
composition, grain, and moisture content are important factors that affect device performance and output
quality. Paper that does not meet the guidelines that are outlined in this manual can cause the following
problems:
●
Poor print quality
●
Increased jams
●
Premature wear on the device, requiring repair
CAUTION: Using media that does not meet HP specifications can cause problems for the device,
requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.
Automatic size-sensing
The device automatically senses the standard sizes of media loaded into trays 2 and 3 (and optional
trays 4, 5, and 6) shown in the following list.
●
A4 (297 x 210 mm; 11.7 x 8.27 inch)
●
Letter (279 x 216 mm; 11 x 8.5 inch)
●
B4-JIS (257 x 364 mm; 10.1 x 14.33 inch)
●
B5-JIS (257 x 182 mm; 10.1 x 7.2 inch)
●
Legal (216 x 356 mm; 8.5 x 14 inch)
●
Executive (267 x 184 mm; 10.5 x 7.25 inch)
●
A5 (210 x 148 mm; 8.27 x 5.83 inch)
●
Executive JIS (216 x 330 mm; 8.5 x 13 inch)
●
A3 (297 x 420 mm; 11.69 x 16.54 inch)
●
Ledger (279 x 432 mm; 11 x 17 inch)
NOTE: A3- and ledger-size media are not supported in tray 2.
66
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Supported media weights and sizes
This section contains information about the sizes, weights, and capacities of paper and other print media
that each tray supports.
Table 4-2 Tray 1 specifications
Media type
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Paper
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 53 lb)
Up to 100 sheets of 60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb) paper.
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.25 x 18.5 inches)
Transparencies and opaque
film
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
Fewer than 100 sheets of
120 to 199 g/m2 (32 to 53 lb) paper
(maximum stack height: 13 mm or
0.5 inch)
Thickness: 0.10 to 0.13 mm
(4 to 5 mils)
Up to 13 mm (0.5 inch) stack height
Thickness: up to 0.23 mm (up to
9 mils)
Up to 13 mm (0.5 inch) stack height
75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb)
Up to 10 envelopes
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.25 x 18.5 inches)
Labels3
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.25 x 18.5 inches)
Envelopes
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.25 x 18.5 inches)
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
3
Smoothness: 100 to 250 (Sheffield).
Table 4-3 Tray 2 specifications
Media type
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Paper
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 250 sheets
Maximum: 297 x 364 mm
(11.7 x 14.33 inches)
ENWW
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Select print media
67
Table 4-4 Tray 3 specifications
Media type
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Paper
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 250 sheets
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 4-5 Optional trays 4, 5, and 6 specifications
Media type
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Paper
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 500 sheets
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 4-6 Specifications for automatic 2-sided printing
Trays
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Tray 1
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 100 sheets
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 250 sheets
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Tray 3: up to 250 sheets
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
Tray 2
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
Maximum: 297 x 364 mm
(11.7 x 14.33 inches)
Tray 3 and optional trays 4, 5,
and 6
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches)
Optional trays 4, 5, and 6: up to
500 sheets
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 4-7 Specifications for automatic stapling and stacking
Operation
Dimensions1
Weight
Output-bin capacity2
Automatic stapling
Standard sizes supported:
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 500 sheets
●
A4 (297 x 210 mm; 11.7 x 8.27 inch)
●
Letter (279 x 216 mm; 11 x 8.5 inch)
NOTE: Automatic stapling is not supported for
rotated A4- or letter-size media.
68
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Table 4-7 Specifications for automatic stapling and stacking (continued)
Operation
Dimensions1
Weight
Output-bin capacity2
Automatic stacking
Standard sizes supported:
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 500 sheets
●
A4 (297 x 210 mm; 11.7 x 8.27 inch)
●
Letter (279 x 216 mm; 11 x 8.5 inch)
●
B4-JIS (257 x 364 mm; 10.1 x 14.33 inch)
●
B5-JIS (257 x 182 mm; 10.1 x 7.2 inch)
●
Legal (216 x 356 mm; 8.5 x 14 inch)
●
Executive (267 x 184 mm; 10.5 x 7.25 inch)
●
A5 (210 x 148 mm; 8.27 x 5.83 inch)
●
Executive JIS (216 x 330 mm; 8.5 x 13 inch)
●
A3 (297 x 420 mm; 11.69 x 16.54 inch)
●
Ledger (279 x 432 mm; 11 x 17 inch)
NOTE: Automatic stacking is not supported for
rotated A4- or letter-size media.
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 4-8 Specifications for the automatic document feeder (ADF)
Media type
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Paper
Minimum: 138 x 210 mm (5.43 x 8.27 inches)
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb)
Up to 50 pages
Maximum: 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 inches)
ENWW
NOTE: The automatic
stapler can staple up to 30
sheets.
1
The device supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media. Check the printer driver for supported sizes.
2
Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Select print media
69
Printing and paper-storage environment
Ideally, the printing and paper-storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and not too
dry or too humid. Remember paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate, while cold
causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the humidity
from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid
weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used
it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture
it can distort. This can cause jams.
As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself. Paper
storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time (about 3
months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can cause
damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened packages
of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not wrapped with a
moisture-proof barrier.
The paper-storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum product performance.
The required condition is 20° to 24°C (68° to 75°F), with a relative humidity of 45% to 55%. The following
guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper's storage environment:
70
●
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid (due to the hygroscopic properties of paper).
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof wrapping.
If the product environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper to be used
during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
●
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air
is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during
printing.
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Load media into the input trays
Load tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Load special print media, such as envelopes, labels, and transparencies, in tray 1 only. Load only paper
in trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6).
Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets of paper, up to 75 transparencies, up to 50 sheets of labels, or up to 10
envelopes.
ENWW
1.
Open tray 1 by pulling the front cover down.
2.
Slide out the plastic tray extender. If the media that is being loaded is longer than 229 mm (9 in),
also flip open the additional tray extender.
3.
Slide the media-width guides slightly wider than the media.
Load media into the input trays
71
4.
For single-sided printing or copying, place media into the tray with the side to be printed facing up
and the top of the media toward the front of the device. The media should be centered between
the media-width guides and under the tabs on the media-width guides.
NOTE: Load A4- and letter-size media with the long edge toward the device. Load other sizes
(and load rotated A4- and letter-size media) with the short edge toward the device.
5.
Slide the media-width guides inward until they lightly touch the media stack on both sides without
bending it. Make sure that the media fits under the tabs on the media-width guides.
NOTE: Do not add media to tray 1 while the device is printing. This could cause a jam. Do not close
the front door when the device is printing.
72
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Customize tray 1 operation
The device can be set to print from tray 1 if it is loaded, or to print only from tray 1 if the type of media
that is loaded is specifically requested.
Setting
Explanation
Tray 1 size is set to Any Size
The device usually pulls media from tray 1 first unless it is empty or closed. If you
do not keep media in tray 1 all the time, or if you use tray 1 only to manually feed
media, keep the default settings of the tray 1 size and type. The default settings
for both the tray 1 size and type are Any. You can change size and type settings
for tray 1 by touching the Trays tab under Supplies Status, and then touching
Modify.
Tray 1 type is set to Any Type
Tray 1 size or type is set to anything other
than Any Size or Any Type
The device treats tray 1 like the other trays. Instead of looking for media in tray 1
first, the device pulls media from the tray that matches type and size settings that
are selected in the software.
In the printer driver, you can select media from any tray (including tray 1) by type,
size, or source. To print by type and size of paper, see Control print jobs
on page 86.
ENWW
Load media into the input trays
73
Load trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6)
Trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6) support only paper. For supported paper sizes, see Select
print media on page 66.
NOTE: To take advantage of automatic size-sensing in the trays, load letter- and A4-size paper with
the short edge of the media toward the front of the tray, as detailed in the steps below.
74
1.
Open the tray.
2.
Press the tab on the paper-length guide and slide it so that the pointer matches the paper size that
you are loading. Make sure that the guide clicks into place. Also adjust the side media-width guides
so that the pointer matches the paper size that you are loading.
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Place the paper in the tray, with the side to be printed facing down for single-sided printing, or
facing up for automatic 2-side printing, and make sure that it is flat at all four corners. Keep the
paper below the height tabs on the paper-length guide in the rear of the tray.
4.
Slide the tray into the device.
Load media into the input trays
75
Load special media
The following table provides guidelines for loading special media and configuring the printer driver. Use
the correct media-type setting in the printer driver to obtain the best print quality. For some types of
media, the device reduces the print speed.
NOTE: In the Windows printer driver, adjust the media type on the Paper tab in the Type is drop-down
list.
In the Macintosh printer driver, adjust the media type on the Printer features pop-up menu in the Media
type drop-down list.
76
Media type
Printer-driver setting
Tray 1 media orientation
Media orientation for other
trays
Normal
Plain or unspecified
Side to be printed facing up
Side to be printed facing down
Envelopes
Envelope
Side to be printed facing up,
Do not print envelopes from
stamp area nearest the
other trays.
device, short edge toward the
device
Labels
Labels
Side to be printed facing up
Do not print labels from other
trays.
Transparencies
Transparencies
Side to be printed facing up
Side to be printed facing down
Glossy
Plain or unspecified
Side to be printed facing up
Side to be printed facing down
Letterhead (single-sided
printing)
Letterhead
Side to be printed facing up,
with the top edge toward the
front of the device
Side to be printed facing
down, with the top edge
toward the front of the device
Letterhead (2-sided printing)
Letterhead
Side to be printed facing
down, with the top edge
toward the front of the device
Side to be printed facing up,
top edge toward the front of
the device
Prepunched (single-sided
printing)
Plain or unspecified
Side to be printed facing up,
with the top edge toward the
front of the device
Side to be printed facing
down, with the top edge
toward the front of the device
Prepunched (2-sided printing) Plain or unspecified
Side to be printed facing
down, with the top edge
toward the front of the device
Side to be printed facing up,
top edge toward the front of
the device
Cardstock
Cardstock
Side to be printed facing up
Side to be printed facing down
Rough
Rough
Side to be printed facing up
Side to be printed facing down
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Load documents for faxing, copying, and scanning
Load a document onto the scanner glass
Use the scanner glass to copy, scan, or fax small, lightweight (less than 60 g/m2 or 16 lb), or irregularlysized originals such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, or old or worn documents.
1.
Open the ADF lid.
2.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, as shown below:
●
ENWW
For letter- and A4-size documents, place the top right-hand corner of the document at the
back, left corner of the scanner glass.
Load documents for faxing, copying, and scanning
77
●
For rotated letter- and A4-size documents, place the top left-hand corner of the document at
the back, left corner of the scanner glass. Also use this orientation for B5-size media and for
custom-size media that is less than 210 mm (8.25 inches) in width.
NOTE: Make sure that the media in the input tray is loaded in the rotated orientation.
●
3.
78
For legal-size, 11 x 17, and A3-size documents, place the top left-hand corner of the document
at the back, left corner of the scanner glass.
Close the ADF lid before you fax, copy, or scan the document.
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Load the automatic document feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF to copy, scan, or fax a document that has up to 50 pages (depending on the thickness of
the pages).
1.
ENWW
Load the document face up in the ADF as shown below:
●
For letter- and A4-size documents, insert the long edge of the document into the ADF with
the top of the document toward the back of the device.
●
For rotated letter- and A4-size documents, insert the short edge (the top of the document) into
the ADF.
Load documents for faxing, copying, and scanning
79
●
80
For legal-size, 11 x 17, and A3-size documents, insert the short edge (the top of the document)
into the ADF.
2.
Slide the stack into the ADF until it does not move any farther.
3.
Adjust the media guides until they are snug against the media.
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Print on rotated media
The device can print on letter, A4, A5, Executive, and B5 (JIS) print media in a rotated orientation (shortedge first) from tray 1 and from tray 2. Printing on rotated media is slower. Some types of media feed
better when rotated, such as prepunched paper (especially when it is printed on both sides from the
optional duplexer) or labels that do not stack flat.
NOTE: To print on rotated A5, Executive, or B5 media, configure the media size as Custom in the
printer driver.
Print from tray 1
1.
Load media with the side to be printed facing up, and the top, short edge toward the device.
2.
On the control panel, touch Supplies Status, touch the name of the tray, and then touch Modify.
3.
Touch Custom.
4.
Set the X Dimension and the Y Dimension. The labels in each tray indicate the X and Y directions.
5.
In the printer driver or software program, select the paper size as you normally would (or select
Custom) and select tray 1 as the media source.
Print from tray 2
ENWW
1.
Load paper with the side to be printed facing down, and the top, short-edge toward the right-hand
side of the tray.
2.
In the printer driver or software program, select the size and source of the rotated paper.
Print on rotated media
81
Print full-bleed images
Full-bleed images extend from edge to edge of the page. To achieve this effect, use larger paper, then
trim its edges to the desired size.
CAUTION: Never print directly to the edge of paper. This causes toner to accumulate inside the device,
which may affect print quality and damage the device. Print on paper up to 312 x 470 mm
(12.28 x 18.5 in), leaving margins on all four sides of at least 2 mm (0.08 in).
NOTE: When printing paper wider than 297 mm (11.7 in), do not use the optional duplexer.
82
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
Print on custom-size media
Custom-size paper can be printed from any of the trays. For media specifications, see Media and trays
on page 59.
NOTE: Very small or very large custom-size paper should be printed from tray 1. The control panel
can be set for one custom size at a time. Do not load more than one size of custom paper into the device.
For best printing performance when you print large numbers of small or narrow media and standard
paper, print the standard paper first and then print the small or narrow media.
Guidelines for printing on custom-size paper
●
Do not attempt to print from tray 1 on paper smaller than 76 mm (3 inches) wide or 127 mm
(5 inches) long.
●
Do not attempt to print from trays 2 or 3 (or from optional trays 4, 5, or 6) on paper smaller than
148 mm (5.83 inches) wide or 210 mm (8.27 inches) long.
●
Set page margins at least 4.23 mm (0.17 in) away from the edges.
Set custom paper sizes
When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected from the software program (the
preferred method), the printer driver, or the control panel.
NOTE: All settings in the printer driver and software program (except configuring custom paper sizes)
override control panel settings. (Software program settings override printer driver settings.)
If the settings are not available from the software, set the custom paper size from the control panel:
ENWW
1.
On the control panel, touch Supplies Status, touch the name of the tray, and then touch Modify.
2.
Touch Custom.
3.
Set the X Dimension and the Y Dimension. The labels in each tray indicate the X and Y directions.
4.
In the software, select Custom as the paper size.
Print on custom-size media
83
Load custom-size media into tray 1
Load custom-size media in tray 1 using the same procedures as for standard-size media. See Load
tray 1 (multipurpose tray) on page 71.
Load custom-size media into trays 2 and 3 (and optional trays 4, 5, and 6)
84
1.
Pull open the tray and remove any media.
2.
Press the tab on media guide in the front of the tray and slide it so that the pointer shows a size
larger than the paper size. Also adjust the side media-width guide to a size larger than the paper
size that you are loading.
3.
Place the media in the tray and make sure that it is flat at all four corners. Keep the stack below
the height tabs on the paper-length guide in the rear of the tray.
Chapter 4 Media and trays
ENWW
ENWW
4.
On the paper-length guide, press the tab and slide it up against the edge of the stack. Also slide
the side media-width guides up against the edge of the stack.
5.
Slide the tray into the device.
Print on custom-size media
85
Control print jobs
When a job is sent to the printer, the printer driver controls what paper tray is used to pull media through
the printer. By default, the printer automatically selects the tray, but a specific tray can be chosen based
on three user-specified settings: Source, Type, and Size. These settings are available from the
Application Setting dialog box, the Print dialog box, or the printer driver.
Setting
Description
Source
Directs the printer to pull paper from a user-specified tray. The
printer tries to print from this tray, no matter what type or size
media is loaded in it. To begin printing, load the selected tray
with the correct type or size of print media for the print job. After
loading the tray, the printer begins printing. If the printer does
not begin printing:
Type or Size
86
Chapter 4 Media and trays
●
Verify the tray configuration matches the size or type of
the print job.
●
Press OK to have the printer try to print from another tray.
Directs the printer to pull paper or print media from the first tray
that is loaded with the type or size that you selected. Always
print by Type for special print media such as labels or
transparencies.
ENWW
5
ENWW
Device features
●
Use the stapler
●
Use job storage features
87
Use the stapler
The stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 30 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. The stapler can staple
these sizes: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive (JIS), and 8.5x13. It can stack up to 500 sheets of paper.
●
Paper weight can range from 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb). Heavier paper might have a stapling
limit of fewer than 30 sheets.
●
If the job consists of only one sheet, or if it consists of more than 30 sheets, the MFP delivers the
job to the bin, but the MFP does not staple the job.
●
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other types of print media, such as envelopes,
transparencies, or labels.
When you want the MFP to staple a document, select stapling in the software. You can usually select
the stapler in your program or printer driver, although some options might be available only in the printer
driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or printer driver.
If you cannot select the stapler in the program or printer driver, select the stapler at the MFP control
panel.
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The printer driver
can be configured to disable the staple option if the staple cartridge is empty.
88
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
Load staples
Each staple cassette holds 5,000 unformed staples.
ENWW
1.
Open the stapler door.
2.
Lift up the green handle on the staple cartridge to dislodge it and then pull the cartridge out of the
device.
3.
Insert the staple cartridge into the opening inside the stapler door and then press the green handle
down.
Use the stapler
89
4.
90
Close the stapler door.
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
Staple media
Select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs
1.
Touch Administration, touch Device Behavior, touch Stapler/Stacker, and then touch Staple.
2.
Touch the option that you want to use, either None or One left angled.
NOTE: Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting to Staple. It is
possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer driver override
settings that are changed at the control panel.
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows)
NOTE: The following procedure changes the default setting to staple all print jobs.
1.
Open the printer driver. See Open the printer drivers on page 11. Look for the column with the
heading "To change the print job default settings."
2.
On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and click One Staple Angled.
NOTE: You can create a Quick Set with the appropriate settings.
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac)
Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver.
1.
Open the printer driver. See Open the printer drivers on page 11. Look for the column with the
heading "To change the print job default settings," and follow the instructions for the operating
system that you are using.
2.
Create the new preset.
Set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs
NOTE: The following procedure changes the default setting for all copy jobs.
1.
Touch Administration, touch Default Job Options, touch Default Copy Options, and then touch
Staple/Collate.
2.
Touch the option that you want to use, either None or One left angled.
Set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job
NOTE: The following procedure sets the stapling option for only the current copy job.
ENWW
1.
Touch Copyand then touch Staple/Collate.
2.
Touch the option that you want to use, either None or Top left angled.
Use the stapler
91
Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues
printing but does not staple the jobs.
92
1.
Touch Administration, touch Device Behavior, touch Stapler/Stacker, and then touch Staples
Out.
2.
Touch the option that you want to use:
●
Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.
●
Select Continue to continue printing jobs without stapling them.
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
Use job storage features
The following job-storage features are available for this device:
●
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of
a job and then print the additional copies.
●
Private jobs: When you send a private job to the device, the job does not print until you provide
the required personal identification number (PIN) at the control panel.
●
QuickCopy jobs: You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of
the job on the device hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.
●
Stored jobs: You can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the device
and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer. See
the specific section for the type of print, copy, or scan job that you want to create.
CAUTION: If you turn off the device, all QuickCopy, proof and hold, and private jobs are deleted.
Gain access to the job storage features
For Windows
1.
On the File menu, click Print.
2.
Click Properties, and then click the Job Storage tab.
3.
Select the job storage mode that you want.
For Macintosh
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older drivers,
select Printer Specific Options.
ENWW
Use job storage features
93
Use the proof and hold feature
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then
to print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed for something
else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.
Create a proof and hold job
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the device deletes
other stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent
the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of
the Proof and Hold option.
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.
The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof. Then, see Print the remaining copies of a proof
and hold job on page 94.
Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job
At the device control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held on
the hard disk.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.
5.
Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print. Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to
print the document.
Delete a proof and hold job
When you send a proof and hold job, the device automatically deletes your previous proof and hold job.
94
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.
5.
Touch Delete.
6.
Touch Yes.
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
Use the private job feature
Use the private printing feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. First, set a 4-digit
PIN by typing the PIN in the printer driver. The PIN is sent to the device as part of the print job. After
you have sent the print job to the device, you must use the PIN to print the job.
Create a private job
To specify that a job is private, in the driver, select the Private Job option, type a user name and job
name, and then type a four-digit PIN. The job will not print until you enter the PIN at the device control
panel.
Print a private job
You can print a private job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the device.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the private job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the private job that you want to print.
NOTE: A private job will have a
[lock symbol] next to it.
5.
Touch the PIN field.
6.
Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
7.
Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.
8.
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.
Delete a private job
A private job is automatically deleted from the device hard disk after you release it for printing. If you
want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the private job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the private job that you want to delete.
NOTE: A private job will have a
ENWW
[lock symbol] next to it.)
5.
Touch the PIN field.
6.
Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
7.
Touch Delete.
Use job storage features
95
Use the QuickCopy feature
The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the device
hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in the printer
driver.
The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the device is 32. At the control
panel, you can set a different default number. See Use the Administration menu on page 19.
Create a QuickCopy job
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the device deletes
other stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the
device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the
QuickCopy option.
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option, and then type a user name and a job name.
When you send the job to print, the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To print
more quick copies at the device control panel, see Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job
on page 96.
Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job
This section describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the device hard disk at the control
panel.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.
5.
Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.
6.
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.
Delete a QuickCopy job
Delete a QuickCopy job at the device control panel when you no longer need it. If the device requires
additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the device automatically deletes other stored QuickCopy
jobs, starting with the oldest job.
NOTE: Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.
96
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.
5.
Touch Delete.
6.
Touch Yes.
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
Use the stored job feature
You can save a print job to the device hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at any time
at the device control panel. For example, you might want to download a personnel form, calendar, time
sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when they need it.
You also can create a stored copy job at the device control panel that can be printed at a later time.
Create a stored copy job
1.
Place the original document face-down on the glass or face-up in the ADF.
2.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
3.
Touch the Create tab.
4.
Specify the name for the stored job in one of these ways:
●
Select an existing folder from the list. Touch New Job and type a job name.
●
Touch the box below the existing Folder Name: or Job Name: on the right-hand side of the
screen, and then edit the text.
5.
A private stored job has a lock icon next to the name, and it requires that you specify a PIN to
retrieve it. To make the job private, select PIN to Print and then type the PIN for the job. Touch
OK.
6.
Touch More Options to view and change other job storage options.
7.
After all the options are set, touch Create Stored Job ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen to
scan the document and store the job. The job is saved on the device until you delete it, so you can
print it as often as necessary.
For information about printing the job, see Print a stored job on page 98.
Create a stored print job
In the driver, select the Stored Job option, and then type a user name and job name. The job does not
print until someone requests it at the device control panel. See Print a stored job on page 98.
ENWW
Use job storage features
97
Print a stored job
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.
5.
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.
6.
Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.
7.
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.
If the file has (lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN. See Use the private
job feature on page 95.
Delete a stored job
Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
Touch the Retrieve tab.
3.
Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.
4.
Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.
5.
Touch Delete.
6.
Touch Yes.
If the file has
on page 95.
98
(lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it. See Use the private job feature
Chapter 5 Device features
ENWW
6
ENWW
Printing tasks
●
Use features in the Windows printer driver
●
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver
●
Cancel a print job
99
Use features in the Windows printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the product features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printerdriver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●
Create and use quick sets
●
Use watermarks
●
Resize documents
●
Set a custom paper size from the printer driver
●
Use different paper and printing covers
●
Print a blank first page
●
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Print on both sides of the paper
●
Use the Services tab
NOTE: Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel settings.
Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Create and use quick sets
Use quick sets to save the current driver settings for reuse. Quick sets are available on most printerdriver tabs. You can save up to 25 Print Task Quick Sets.
Create a quick set
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
Select the print settings that you want to use.
3.
In the Print Task Quick Sets box, type a name for the quick set.
4.
Click Save.
Use quick sets
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
Select the quick set that you want to use from the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
3.
Click OK.
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select Default Print Settings from the Print Task Quick
Sets drop-down list.
100 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
Use watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as "Confidential," that is printed in the background of each page of a
document.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
3.
From the Effects tab, click the Watermarks drop-down list.
4.
Click the watermark that you want to use. To create a new watermark, click Edit.
5.
If you want the watermark to appear only on the first page of the document, click First Page
Only.
6.
Click OK.
To remove the watermark, click (none) in the Watermarks drop-down list.
Resize documents
Use the document resizing options to scale a document to a percentage of its normal size. You can also
choose to print a document on a different size paper, with or without scaling.
Reduce or enlarge a document
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
3.
On the Effects tab, next to % of Normal Size, type the percentage by which you want to reduce
or enlarge your document.
You can also use the scroll bar to adjust the percentage.
4.
Click OK.
Print a document onto a different paper size
ENWW
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
3.
On the Effects tab, click Print Document On.
4.
Select the paper size to print on.
5.
To print the document without scaling it to fit, make sure that the Scale to Fit option is not selected.
6.
Click OK.
Use features in the Windows printer driver 101
Set a custom paper size from the printer driver
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
3.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Custom.
4.
On the Custom Paper Size window, type the name of the custom paper size.
5.
Type the paper-size length and width. If you type a size that is too small or too large, the driver
adjusts the size to the minimum or maximum size that is allowed.
6.
If necessary, click the button to change the unit of measure between millimeters and inches.
7.
Click Save.
8.
Click Close. The name that you saved appears in the paper-size list for future use.
Use different paper and printing covers
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print job.
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, select the appropriate paper for the first page of the print job.
3.
Click Use Different Paper/Covers.
4.
In the list box, click the pages or covers that you want to print on different paper.
5.
To print front or back covers, you must also select Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
6.
In the Source is and Type is list boxes, select the appropriate paper type or source for the other
pages of the print job.
NOTE: The paper size must be the same for all pages of the print job.
Print a blank first page
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Use Different Paper/Covers.
3.
In the list box, click Front Cover.
4.
Click Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
102 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
3.
Click the Finishing tab.
4.
In the section for Document Options, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
5.
If the number of pages is greater than 1, select the correct options for Print Page Borders and
Page Order.
●
6.
ENWW
If you need to change the page orientation, click the Finishing tab, and then click Portrait or
Landscape.
Click OK. The product is now set to print the number of pages per sheet that you have selected.
Use features in the Windows printer driver 103
Print on both sides of the paper
When duplex printing is available, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. If duplex printing
is not available, you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the paper through the product
a second time.
NOTE: In the printer driver, Print on Both Sides (manually) is available only when duplex printing is
not available or when duplex printing does not support the type of print media being used.
To configure the product for automatic or manual duplex printing, open the printer-driver properties, click
the Device Settings tab, and then select the appropriate settings under Installable Options.
NOTE: The Device Settings tab is not available from within software programs.
NOTE: The procedure to open the printer-driver properties depends on the operating system that you
are using. For information about opening the printer-driver properties for your operating system, see
Open the printer drivers on page 11. Look for the column titled "To change the device configuration
settings".
Use automatic duplex printing
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge at the
back of the tray.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond).
2.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
3.
On the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides.
●
4.
If necessary, select Flip Pages Up to change the manner in which pages are turned, or select
a binding option in the Booklet Layout list box.
Click OK.
104 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
Print on both sides manually
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●
For all other trays, load letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge at the back
of the tray.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond).
2.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
3.
On the Finishing tab, select Print on Both Sides (manually).
4.
Click OK.
5.
Send the print job to the product. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears before
feeding the output stack into tray 1 for printing the second half.
6.
Go to the product. Remove any blank paper that is in tray 1. Insert the printed stack with the printed
side up, and the bottom-edge feeding into the product first. You must print the second side from
tray 1.
7.
If prompted, press a control-panel button to continue.
Layout options for printing on both sides
The four duplex orientation options are shown here. To select option 1 or 4, select Flip Pages Up in the
printer driver.
1
4
3
2
2
2
3
2
5
3
2
5
3
5
3
5
ENWW
1. Long-edge landscape
Every other printed image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
2. Short-edge landscape
Every printed image is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are read from top to
bottom.
3. Long-edge portrait
This is the default setting, and the most common layout used. Every printed image
is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are read from top to bottom.
4. Short-edge portrait
Every other printed image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
Use features in the Windows printer driver 105
Use the Services tab
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services tab to obtain product and supply-status
information. Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status page of the
HP Embedded Web Server. This page shows the current status of the product, the percentage of life
remaining for each supply, and information for ordering supplies. For more information, see Use the
embedded Web server on page 145.
106 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the device features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printerdriver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●
Create and use presets
●
Print a cover page
●
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Print on both sides of the paper
NOTE: Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel settings.
Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Create and use presets
Use presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.
Create a preset
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
Select the print settings.
3.
In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.
4.
Click OK.
Use presets
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
In the Presets menu, select the preset that you want to use.
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select the Standard preset.
ENWW
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 107
Print a cover page
You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as “Confidential”).
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
On the Cover Page or Paper/Quality pop-up menu, select whether to print the cover page Before
Document or After Document.
3.
In the Cover Page Type pop-up menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover
page.
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way
to print draft pages.
1.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
2.
Click the Layout pop-up menu.
3.
Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,
4, 6, 9, or 16).
4.
Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
5.
Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
108 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
Print on both sides of the paper
When duplex printing is available, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. Otherwise, you
can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the paper through the device a second time.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).
Use automatic duplex printing
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the
tray.
2.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
3.
Open the Layout pop-up menu.
4.
Next to Two Sided Printing, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.
5.
Click Print.
Print on both sides manually
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the
tray.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).
2.
Open the printer driver (see Open the printer drivers on page 11).
3.
On the Finishing pop-up menu, select the Manual Duplex option.
NOTE: If the Manual Duplex option is not enabled, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.
ENWW
4.
Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen
before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half.
5.
Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in tray 1.
6.
Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1. You
must print the second side from tray 1.
7.
If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 109
Cancel a print job
You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program. For instructions
about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific
network software.
NOTE: It can take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.
Stop the current print job from the control panel
1.
Press Stop on the control panel.
2.
On the touchscreen, on the Device Has Been Paused screen, touch Cancel current job.
NOTE: If the print job is too far into the printing process, you might not have the option to cancel
it.
Stop the current print job from the software program
A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen, giving you the option to cancel the print job.
If several requests have been sent to the device through your software, they might be waiting in a print
queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software documentation for specific
instructions about canceling a print request from the computer.
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows XP), delete the
print job there.
Click Start and then click Printers. Double-click the device icon to open the print spooler. Select the
print job that you want to cancel, and then press Delete. If the print job is not cancelled, you might need
to shut down and restart the computer.
110 Chapter 6 Printing tasks
ENWW
7
Copy
This device can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the printing system
software on the computer, nor is it necessary to have the computer turned on to make photocopies. You
can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also copy originals by using either the ADF
or the scanner glass. The device can process copying, printing, and digital-sending jobs simultaneously.
This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy settings, including
the following topics:
●
Use the Copy screen
●
Set the default copy options
●
Basic copy instructions
●
Adjust the copy settings
●
Change the copy-collation setting
●
Copy two-sided documents
●
Copy mixed-size originals
●
Copy photos and books
●
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build
●
Cancel a copy job
It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the device copying
functions. See Control panel on page 15 for more information.
ENWW
111
Use the Copy screen
From the Home screen, touch Copy to view the Copy screen. The Copy screen is shown in Figure
7-1 Copy screen on page 112. Note that only the first six copy features are immediately visible. In order
to view additional copy features, touch More Options.
Figure 7-1 Copy screen
112 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
Set the default copy options
You can use the administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary,
you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the device returns to the
default settings.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.
2.
Touch Default Job Options, and then touch Default Copy Options.
3.
Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.
For information about each option, see Adjust the copy settings on page 115. The built-in Help
system also provides an explanation of each option. Touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
4.
ENWW
To exit the administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.
Set the default copy options 113
Basic copy instructions
This section provides the basic instructions for copying.
Copy from the scanner glass
Use the scanner glass to make as many as 999 copies of small, lightweight media (less than 60 g/m2
or 16 lb) or heavy media (more than 105 g/m2 or 28 lb). This includes media such as receipts, newspaper
clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents, and books.
Place original documents face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left
corner of the glass.
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings
on page 115.
Copy from the document feeder
Use the document feeder to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages
(depending on the thickness of the pages). Place the document into the document feeder with the pages
facing up.
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings
on page 115.
Before starting another copy job, retrieve the original document from the document-feeder output bin
that is under the document feeder input tray, and retrieve the copies from the appropriate output bin.
114 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
Adjust the copy settings
The device offers several features so you can optimize copied output. These features are all available
on the Copy screen.
The Copy screen consists of several pages. From the first page, touch More Options to go to the next
page. Then touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to other pages.
For details about how to use an option, touch the option, and then touch the help ( ) button in the upperright corner of the screen. The following table provides an overview of the copy options.
NOTE: Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, some of these options
might not appear. The options in the table are listed in the order in which they can appear.
Option name
Description
Sides
Use this feature to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and
whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides.
Staple/Collate or Collate
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker/Separator is attached, the Staple/Collate option is available.
Use this feature to set up options for stapling and assembling the pages in sets of copies.
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker/Separator is not attached, the Collate option is available. Use
this feature to assemble each set of copied pages in the same order as the original document.
ENWW
Paper Selection
Use this feature to select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use.
Image Adjustment
Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy. For example, you can adjust the
darkness and sharpness, and you can use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint
images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Content Orientation
Use this feature to specify the way the content of the original page is placed on the page: portrait
or landscape.
Output Bin
Use this feature to select an output bin for the copies.
Optimize Text/Picture
Use this feature to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the
output for text or printed pictures, or you can manually adjust the values.
Pages per Sheet
Use this feature to copy multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.
Original Size
Use this feature to describe the page size of the original document.
Booklet Format
Use this feature to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets
in the center to form a booklet.
Edge-To-Edge
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original
document is printed close to the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/Enlarge feature
to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.
Job Build
Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this
feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can
accommodate at one time.
Adjust the copy settings 115
Change the copy-collation setting
You can set the device to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are making
two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order: 1,2,3,1,2,3. If
automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.
To use the automatic collation, the original document size must fit into the memory. If it does not, the
device makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change. If that happens, use
one of the following methods to finish the job:
●
Split the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.
●
Make only one copy of the document at a time.
●
Turn off the automatic collation.
The collation setting you select is in effect for all copies until you change the setting. The default setting
for automatic copy collation is On.
1.
On the control panel, touch Copy.
2.
Touch Staple/Collate.
3.
Touch Collate.
116 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
Copy two-sided documents
Two-sided documents can be copied manually or automatically.
Copying two-sided documents manually
Copies resulting from this procedure are printed on one side, and need to be hand-collated.
1.
Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder input tray with the first page facing up,
and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.
2.
Touch Start Copy. The odd-numbered pages are copied and printed.
3.
Remove the stack from the document feeder output tray and reload the stack with the last page
facing up, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.
4.
Touch Start Copy. The even-numbered pages are copied and printed.
5.
Collate the odd- and even-numbered printed copies.
Copy two-sided documents automatically (duplex models only)
The default copy setting is one-sided to one-sided. Use the following procedures to change the setting
so you can copy from or to documents that are two-sided.
Make two-sided copies from one-sided documents
1.
Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with
the top of the page leading.
2.
On the control panel, touch Copy.
3.
Touch Sides.
4.
Touch 1–sided original, 2–sided output.
5.
Touch OK.
6.
Touch Start Copy.
Make two-sided copies from two-sided documents
1.
Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with
the top of the page leading.
NOTE: Two-sided copying from the flatbed scanner glass is not supported.
2.
ENWW
On the control panel, touch Copy.
Copy two-sided documents 117
3.
Touch Sides.
4.
Touch 2–sided original, 2–sided output.
5.
Touch OK.
6.
Touch Start Copy.
Make one-sided copies from two-sided documents
1.
Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with
the top of the page leading.
2.
On the control panel, touch Copy.
3.
Touch Sides.
4.
Touch 2–sided original, 1–sided output.
5.
Touch OK.
6.
Touch Start Copy.
118 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
Copy mixed-size originals
You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of
paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine letter and legal sizes, or you could
combine A4 and A5 sizes.
1.
Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.
2.
Place the sheets face-up into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the
document.
3.
From the Home screen, touch Copy.
4.
Touch Original Size.
NOTE: If this option is not on the first screen, touch More Options until the option appears.
ENWW
5.
Select Mixed Ltr/Lgl, and then touch OK.
6.
Touch Start Copy.
Copy mixed-size originals 119
Copy photos and books
Copy a photo
NOTE: Photos should be copied from the flatbed scanner, not from the document feeder.
1.
Lift the lid and place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture-side down and the upperleft corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.
2.
Gently close the lid.
3.
Touch Start Copy.
Copy a book
1.
Lift the lid and place the book on the flatbed scanner with the page that you want to copy at the
upper-left corner of the glass.
2.
Gently close the lid.
3.
Gently press down on the lid to press the book to the flatbed scanner surface.
4.
Touch Start Copy.
120 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build
Use the Job Build feature to build a single copy job from multiple scans. You can use either the document
feeder or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.
1.
Touch Copy.
2.
Scroll to and touch Job Build.
3.
Touch Job Build On.
4.
Touch OK.
5.
If necessary, select the desired copy options.
6.
Touch Start Copy. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
7.
If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch Start Copy.
If the job contains no more pages, touch HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide to
print.
NOTE: In Job Build, if you scan the first page of a document by using the document feeder, then you
must scan all of the pages in that document by using the document feeder. If you scan the first page of
a document by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using
the scanner glass.
ENWW
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build 121
Cancel a copy job
To cancel the copy job that is currently running, touch Stop on the control panel. This pauses the device.
Then touch Cancel current job.
NOTE: If you cancel a copy job, clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic
document feeder.
122 Chapter 7 Copy
ENWW
8
Scan and send e-mail
The device offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you can
scan black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail attachment.
To use digital sending, the device must be connected to a local area network (LAN). The device connects
directly to your LAN.
NOTE: The device cannot copy or print in color, but it can scan and send color images.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
ENWW
●
Configure e-mail settings
●
Use the Send E-mail screen
●
Perform basic e-mail functions
●
Use the address book
●
Change e-mail settings for the current job
●
Scan to a folder
●
Scan to a workflow destination
123
Configure e-mail settings
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the device for e-mailing.
NOTE: The instructions that follow are for configuring the device at the control panel. You can also
perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see Embedded
Web server on page 13.
Supported protocols
The HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP model supports SMTP and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP).
SMTP
●
SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e-mail.
In order for the device to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has a valid
SMTP IP address. The SMTP server must also have Internet access.
●
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address for
your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL connection, contact the service provider
to obtain the SMTP server IP address.
●
LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the device uses LDAP, it searches
a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an autocomplete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type. As
you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.
●
The device supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the
device to be able to send to e-mail.
LDAP
NOTE: If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the embedded
Web server. For more information, see Use the embedded Web server on page 145, or see the
Embedded Web Server User Guide.
Configure e-mail server settings
Consult your system administrator to find the IP address for the SMTP server. Or, find the IP address
from the device control panel (touch Network Address). Then use the following procedures to manually
configure and test the IP address.
Configure the SMTP gateway address
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch SMTP Gateway.
4.
Type the SMTP gateway address, either as an IP address or as a fully qualified domain name. If
you do not know the IP address or domain name, contact the network administrator.
5.
Touch OK.
124 Chapter 8 Scan and send e-mail
ENWW
Test the SMTP settings
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch Test Send Gateways.
If the configuration is correct, Gateways OK appears on the control-panel display.
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If you receive
the e-mail, you have successfully configured the digital-sending feature.
If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:
●
Check the SMTP and address to make sure that you typed them correctly.
●
Print a configuration page. Verify that the SMTP gateway address is correct.
●
Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a computer. If
you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not receive the e-mail, contact
your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).
●
Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateway. You can download the
file from the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support/ljm5039mfp.
Find gateways
If you do not know the SMTP gateway address, you can use one of the following methods to find it.
Find the SMTP gateway from the device control panel
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Initial Setup.
3.
Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch Find Send Gateways.
The touchscreen displays a list of detected SMTP servers.
4.
Select the correct SMTP server, and then touch OK.
Find the SMTP gateway from an e-mail program
Because most e-mail programs also use SMTP to send e-mail and LDAP to address e-mail messages,
you might be able to find the hostname of the SMTP gateway and LDAP server by looking at the settings
for your e-mail program.
NOTE: The find gateway features might be unable to detect a valid SMTP server on the network if it
uses an internet service provider (ISP). To find the ISP e-mail server address, contact the ISP.
ENWW
Configure e-mail settings 125
Use the Send E-mail screen
Use the touchscreen to navigate through the options on the Send E-mail screen.
1
Send E-mail button
Touching this button scans the document and sends an e-mail file to the provided e-mail
addresses.
2
Home button
Touching this button opens the Home screen.
3
From: field
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type your e-mail address. If the system
administrator has configured the device to do so, this field might automatically insert a default
address.
4
To: field
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type the e-mail addresses of those whom you
want to receive the scanned document.
5
Subject: field
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type a subject title.
6
More Options button
Touch this button to change certain e-mail settings for the current scan job.
7
Scroll bar
Use the scroll bar to view and set up the CC:, BCC:, Message, and File Name fields. Touch any
of those fields to open the keyboard and add the necessary information.
8
Address book buttons
Touch these buttons to use the address book to populate the To:, CC:, or BCC: fields. For more
information, see Use the address book on page 129.
9
Help button
Touch this button for control-panel help. For more information, see Control panel on page 15.
10
Error/warning button
This button appears only when there is an error or warning in the status line area. Touch it to open
a pop-up screen that will help you resolve the error or warning.
126 Chapter 8 Scan and send e-mail
ENWW
Perform basic e-mail functions
The device e-mail feature offers the following benefits:
●
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.
●
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that the
recipient can manipulate.
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the device memory and sent to an e-mail address or multiple
addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats, such
as .TFF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet
their specific needs. Documents arrive in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or
forwarded.
In order to use the e-mail feature, the device needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network
that includes Internet access.
Load documents
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can accommodate
Letter-, Executive-, A4-, and A5-size originals. The ADF can also accommodate Legal-size originals.
Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn documents, stapled documents, previously folded
documents, and photographs should be scanned by using the glass. Multiple-page documents can be
scanned easily by using the ADF.
ENWW
Perform basic e-mail functions 127
Send documents
The device scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or change the
scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:
●
Color
●
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat® viewer to view the e-mail attachment)
For information about changing the settings for the current job, see Change e-mail settings for the current
job on page 131.
Send a document
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
2.
From the Home screen, touch E-mail.
3.
If prompted, type your user name and password.
4.
Complete the From:, To:, and Subject: fields. Scroll down and complete the CC:, BCC:, and
Message fields if appropriate. Your user name or other default information might appear in the
From: field. If so, you might not be able to change it.
5.
(Optional) Touch More Options to change the settings for the document that you are sending (for
example, the document’s original size). If you are sending a two-sided document, you should select
Sides and an option with a two-sided original.
6.
Press Start to begin sending.
7.
When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass or ADF.
Use the auto-complete function
When you type characters into the To:, CC:, or From: fields on the Send E-mail screen, the autocomplete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen,
the device automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using
the first match. You can then select that name by touching Enter, or continue typing the name until autocomplete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list, the
auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in
the address book.
128 Chapter 8 Scan and send e-mail
ENWW
Use the address book
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the device. See your
system administrator for information about configuring address lists.
NOTE: You can also use the embedded Web server to create and manage the e-mail address book.
For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 13.
Create a recipient list
1.
From the Home screen, touch E-mail.
2.
Complete one of the following steps:
●
Touch To: to open the keyboard screen, and then type the recipients' e-mail addresses.
Separate multiple e-mail addresses with a semicolon or by touching Enter on the touchscreen.
●
Use the address book.
) to open the address
a.
On the Send E-mail screen, touch the address book button (
book.
b.
Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to
scroll quickly through the list.
c.
Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch the add button (
).
You can also select a distribution list by touching the drop-down list at the top of the
screen and then touching All, or add a recipient from a local list by touching Local in the
drop-down list. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch
to add the name to
your list of recipients.
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then
touching the remove button ( ).
ENWW
3.
The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want, you
can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on the
keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.
4.
Touch OK.
5.
Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send E-mail screen, if necessary.
You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text line.
6.
Press Start.
Use the address book 129
Use the local address book
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book can be
shared between devices that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software.
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or BCC: fields.
You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.
To open the address book, touch the address book button ( ).
Add e-mail addresses to the local address book
1.
Touch Local.
2.
Touch
3.
(Optional) Touch the Name field, and in the keyboard that appears type a name for the new entry.
Touch OK.
.
The name is the alias for the e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the
e-mail address itself.
4.
Touch the Address field, and in the keyboard that appears type the e-mail address for the new
entry. Touch OK.
Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.
NOTE: To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the corrected
address as a new address in the local address book.
1.
Touch Local.
2.
Touch the e-mail address that you want to delete.
3.
Touch
.
The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected address(es)?
4.
Touch Yes to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch No to return to the Address Book screen.
130 Chapter 8 Scan and send e-mail
ENWW
Change e-mail settings for the current job
Use the More Options button to change the following e-mail settings for the current print job:
ENWW
Button
Description
Document File Type
Touch this button to change the type of file the device creates after scanning the document.
Output Quality
Touch this button to increase or decrease the print quality of the file being scanned. A higher quality
setting produces a larger file size.
Resolution
Touch this button to change the scan resolution. A higher resolution setting produces a larger file size.
Color/Black
Touch this button to determine whether you will scan the document in color or in black-and-white.
Original Sides
Touch this button to indicate if the original document is one-sided or two-sided.
Content Orientation
Touch this button to select either the portrait or landscape orientation for the original.
Original Size
Touch this button to select the size of the document: letter, A4, legal, or mixed letter/legal.
Optimize Text/
Picture
Touch this button to change the scanning procedure based on the type of document that you are
scanning.
Job Build
Touch this button to activate or deactivate the Job Build mode, which enables you to scan several small
scan jobs and send them as one file.
Image Adjustment
Touch this button to change the darkness and sharpness settings, or to clean up background clutter on
the original.
Change e-mail settings for the current job 131
Scan to a folder
If the system administrator has made the feature available, the device can scan a file and send it to a
folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Novell.
NOTE: You might be required to supply a user name and password in order to use this option, or to
send to certain folders. See your system administrator for more information.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
2.
From the Home screen, touch Network Folder.
3.
In the Quick Access Folders list, select the folder in which you want to save the document.
4.
Touch the File Name field to open the keyboard pop-up screen, and then type the file name.
5.
Touch Send to Network Folder.
Scan to a workflow destination
If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document and send
it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional
information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file transfer protocol (FTP)
location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel display. The system administrator
can also designate a printer as a workflow destination, which allows you to scan a document and then
send it directly to a network printer for printing.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
2.
From the Home screen, touch Workflow.
3.
Select the destination to which you want to scan.
4.
In the Text Field field, type the data that you want to accompany the file, and then touch Send
Workflow.
132 Chapter 8 Scan and send e-mail
ENWW
9
Fax
The HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP model comes with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300; already
installed. Windows users can also install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS), which provides
digital faxing services.
For complete instructions for configuring the fax accessory and for using the fax features, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. The guide is included with the HP LaserJet
M5039XS MFP.
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
●
Analog fax
●
Digital fax
133
Analog fax
When the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax
machine.
The HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP model comes with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 already
installed.
Install the fax accessory
Use this procedure to install the analog fax accessory if it is not already installed.
1.
Turn off the device, and disconnect all of the cables.
2.
At the back of the device, remove the formatter cover.
134 Chapter 9 Fax
ENWW
3.
Open the formatter door.
4.
Remove the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch.
CAUTION: The fax accessory contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
When removing the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch and while installing it, use static
protection, such as a grounding wrist strap that is connected to the metal frame of the device, or
touch the metal frame of the device with your other hand.
5.
ENWW
Use the plastic clips to secure the fax accessory on the formatter.
Analog fax 135
6.
Locate the 16-wire cable near the lower corner of the formatter and plug the cable into the fax
accessory.
NOTE: If the cable doesn't seem to fit, try turning the cable around. Make sure the connector is
correctly fastened to the fax accessory. Also make sure that the connector at the other end of the
cable is correctly fastened to the formatter.
7.
Close the formatter door.
8.
Replace the formatter cover.
136 Chapter 9 Fax
ENWW
9.
ENWW
Reconnect the cables, and then turn on the device.
Analog fax 137
Connect the fax accessory to a phone line
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line that is being used for
the fax accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. In addition, this line should
be an analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems.
If you are not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.
NOTE: HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the
accessory functions correctly.
1.
Locate the phone cord that is included in the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone cord
to the fax-accessory phone jack on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax-accessory phone jack , which is near the
bottom of the formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect LAN port, which is closer
to the top of the formatter.
2.
Connect the other end of the phone cord to the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until it
clicks or until it is securely seated. Because different types of connectors are used in different
countries/regions, the connector might not make an audible click.
Configure and use the fax features
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For example,
you need to specify the following information:
●
Date and time
●
Location
●
Fax header
For complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory, and for information about
troubleshooting fax-accessory problems, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide,
which is provided with the fax accessory.
138 Chapter 9 Fax
ENWW
Digital fax
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information
about ordering this software, go to www.hp.com/go/ljm5039mfp_software.
With digital faxing, the device does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the device
can send a fax in one of three ways:
●
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.
●
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and digital sender module that the computer uses
to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.
●
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes. The fax is delivered to a traditional fax
machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the
HP Digital Sending Software.
ENWW
Digital fax 139
140 Chapter 9 Fax
ENWW
10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
●
Use information pages
●
Configure e-mail alerts
●
Use the embedded Web server
●
Use HP Web Jetadmin software
●
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●
Manage supplies
●
Replace supplies and parts
●
Clean the device
●
Calibrate the scanner
141
Use information pages
From the control panel, print pages that give details about the device and its current configuration. The
table below provides the instructions for printing the information pages.
Page description
How to print the page
Menu map
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Shows the control-panel menus and
available settings.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Administration Menu Map.
5.
Touch Print.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in
the device.
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Control panel
on page 15.
Configuration page
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Shows device settings and installed
accessories.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Configuration Page.
5.
Touch Print.
NOTE: If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk
drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those
devices.
Supplies status page
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Shows print-cartridge toner levels.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Supplies Status Page.
5.
Touch Print.
NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show
the remaining life for those supplies. For more information, see HP policy on nonHP print cartridges on page 150.
Usage page
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Shows a page count for each size of
paper printed, the number of one-sided
(simplexed) or two-sided (duplexed)
pages, and the average percentage of
coverage.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Usage Page.
5.
Touch Print.
142 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Page description
How to print the page
File directory
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Contains information for any mass
storage devices, such as flash drives,
memory cards, or hard disks, that are
installed in the device.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch File Directory.
5.
Touch Print.
Fax reports
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Five reports show fax activity, fax calls,
billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and
speed-dial numbers.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Fax Reports.
NOTE: Fax reports are available only
on device models that have fax
capabilties.
4.
Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:
5.
◦
Fax Activity Log
◦
Fax Call Report
◦
Billing Codes Report
◦
Blocked Fax List
◦
Speed Dial List
Touch Print.
For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.
Font lists
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
Shows which fonts are currently
installed in the device.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Sample Pages/Fonts.
4.
Touch either PCL Font List or PS Font List.
5.
Touch Print.
NOTE:
DIMM.
ENWW
The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or
Use information pages 143
Configure e-mail alerts
NOTE: If your company does not have e-mail, this feature might not be available.
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server to configure the system to alert you of
problems with the device. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account(s) that you
specify.
You can configure the following:
●
The device(s) you want to monitor
●
The alerts you want to receive (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and
cover open)
●
The e-mail account(s) to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software
Information location
HP Web Jetadmin
See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 147 for general information about HP Web
Jetadmin.
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
Embedded Web server
See Use the embedded Web server on page 145 for general information about the
embedded Web server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
144 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Use the embedded Web server
●
View device control status information
●
Set the type of paper loaded in each tray
●
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones
●
View and change tray configurations
●
View and change the device control panel menu configuration
●
View and print internal pages
●
Receive notification of device and supplies events
●
View and change network configuration
●
View support content that is specific to the current state of the device
When the device is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. You
can open the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or Netscape
Navigator 4 and later. The embedded Web server works when the device is connected to an IP-based
network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based or AppleTalk printer connections. You
do not need Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection
1.
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the
address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Use
information pages on page 142.
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the
future.
2.
The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the device:
the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Networking tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
See Embedded Web server sections on page 146 for more information about each tab.
ENWW
Use the embedded Web server 145
Embedded Web server sections
Tab or section
Options
Information tab
●
Device Status: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies,
with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of
print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change
Settings.
●
Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.
●
Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating
that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers.
●
Event log: Shows a list of all device events and errors.
●
Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed,
grouped by size and type.
●
Device Information: Shows the device network name, address, and model
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
●
Control Panel: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as Ready or
Sleep mode on.
●
Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.
Settings tab
●
Configure Device: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the
traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.
Provides the ability to configure the
device from your computer
●
E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up
incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
●
Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device
and supplies events.
●
AutoSend: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding
device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.
●
Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the
embedded Web server.
●
Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This
link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.
●
Device Information: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to
it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive
information about the device.
●
Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded
Web server information.
●
Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.
●
Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.
Provides device, status, and
configuration information
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network,
always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.
Networking tab
Provides the ability to change
network settings from your
computer
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is
directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything
other than an HP Jetdirect print server.
NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected.
146 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Use HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this
free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically
connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.
ENWW
Use HP Web Jetadmin software 147
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
Use the HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X computer.
Open the HP Printer Utility
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8
1.
Open the Finder, and then click Applications.
2.
Click Library, and then click Printers.
3.
Click hp, and then click Utilities.
4.
Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.
5.
Select the device that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3, V10.4 and later
1.
In the Dock, click the Printer Setup Utility icon.
NOTE: If the Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click
Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.
2.
Select the device that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
148 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
HP Printer Utility features
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.
ENWW
Item
Description
Configuration Page
Prints a configuration page.
Supplies Status
Shows the device supplies status.
File Upload
Transfers files from the computer to the device.
Upload Fonts
Transfers font files from the computer to the device.
Firmware Update
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.
Duplex Mode
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.
Economode & Toner Density
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.
Resolution
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.
Lock Resources
Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.
Stored Jobs
Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.
Trays Configuration
Changes the default tray settings.
IP Settings
Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.
Bonjour Settings
Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name
that is listed on a network.
Additional Settings
Provides access to the embedded Web server.
E-mail Alerts
Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 149
Manage supplies
Using, storing, and monitoring the print cartridge can help ensure high-quality output.
Supplies life
The average cartridge yield is 15,000 pages in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual cartridge yield
depends on specific use.
CAUTION: The Economode feature allows the device to use less toner per page. Selecting
Economode extends the life of the toner supply and reduces the cost per page but reduces print quality.
The printed image is lighter but is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. Hewlett-Packard does not
recommend full-time use of Economode. If Economode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast
the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances,
install a new print cartridge even if the print cartridge still contains toner.
Approximate print-cartridge replacement intervals
Print cartridge
Page count
Approximate time period1
Black
15,000 pages2
6 months
1
Approximate life is based on 2,000 pages per month.
2
Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on approximately 5% coverage.
To order supplies, contact your dealer.
Manage the print cartridge
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes.
Use genuine HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:
●
Percentage of supplies remaining
●
Estimated number of pages remaining
●
Number of pages printed
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their
quality.
NOTE: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and
service agreements.
150 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
To install a new HP print cartridge, see Change the print cartridge on page 152. To recycle the used
cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge.
Print-cartridge authentication
The device automatically authenticates the print cartridge when it is inserted into the device. During
authentication, the device notifies you whether a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge.
If the device control-panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe
you purchased an HP print cartridge, see HP fraud hotline and Web site on page 151.
HP fraud hotline and Web site
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge
is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
ENWW
●
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the
packaging differs from HP packaging).
Manage supplies 151
Replace supplies and parts
Carefully follow the guidelines in this section when replacing device supplies.
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the
device.
●
Sufficient space is required above and in the front of the device for removing supplies.
●
The device should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.
For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see
more information at www.hp.com/support/ljm5039mfp.
NOTE: Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of HP products in this device. Use of non-HP products
may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.
Change the print cartridge
When a print cartridge approaches the end of useful life, a message appears on the control panel
recommending that you order a replacement. The device can continue to print using the current print
cartridge until a message appears instructing you to replace the cartridge.
1.
Open the upper-right door door.
2.
Remove the used print cartridge from the device.
152 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
3.
Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
4.
Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge.
CAUTION: Do not touch the shutter or the surface of the roller.
5.
ENWW
Remove the shipping tape and the orange tab from the new print cartridge. Discard the shipping
tape according to local regulations.
Replace supplies and parts 153
6.
Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the device, and, using the handle, insert the print
cartridge until it is firmly seated, and then close the upper-right door.
After a short time, the control panel should display Ready.
7.
Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived.
See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
8.
If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the device control panel for further instructions.
For additional help, contact your dealer.
154 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Perform preventive maintenance
The device requires periodic maintenance to maintain optimum performance. A control-panel message
alerts you when it is time to purchase the preventive maintenance kits. Separate maintenance
procedures are required for the printer-portion of the device (the print engine) and for the automatic
document feeder (ADF).
Preventive maintenance for the print engine
You should replace certain parts when a control-panel message alerts you to perform printer
maintenance.
When page count approaches 200,000 pages printed, the device alerts you to order a maintenance kit.
The message can be temporarily cleared by using the Clear Maintenance Message item on the
Resets submenu under Administration. When the page count reaches 200,000, you can no longer clear
the message and you must install the maintenance kit. To check the number of pages that the device
has printed since new maintenance-kit components were installed, print either a configuration page or
a supplies-status page.
The print-engine maintenance kit includes the following items:
●
Fuser
●
Rollers (transfer, feed, and separation)
●
Separation pads
●
Installation instructions
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
NOTE: The maintenance kit is a consumable item and is not covered under the original warranty or
under most extended warranties.
The ADF maintenance kit
When the device approaches 60,000 pages fed through the ADF, the device alerts you to order an ADF
kit. This message appears approximately one month before the kit needs to be replaced. Order a new
kit when this message appears. After feeding 60,000 pages through the ADF, the device alerts you to
install the new ADF kit. Install the new kit at that time.
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:
●
One pick-up roller assembly
●
One separation pad
●
An instruction sheet
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
ENWW
Replace supplies and parts 155
Clean the device
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing (see Solve printquality problems on page 201). This product has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these
types of problems.
Clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the device.
Clean the scanner glass
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the
accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy.
NOTE: If streaks or other defects appear only on copies produced using the automatic document
feeder (ADF), clean the scanner strip (step 3). It is not necessary to clean the scanner glass.
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Clean the glass by using a damp, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the device; these can damage the device. Do not place liquids directly
on the glass. They might seep under it and damage the device.
3.
Clean the scanner strip by using a damp, lint-free cloth.
156 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Clean the scanner lid backing
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing that is located underneath the scanner
lid.
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Clean the white document lid backing by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
a mild soap and warm water. Also, clean the scanner strip next to the ADF scanner glass.
3.
Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.
4.
Dry the backing by using a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION: Do not use paper-based wipes because they might scratch the backing.
5.
If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps and use isopropyl alcohol
to dampen the cloth or sponge, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove
any residual alcohol.
Clean the ADF
If the ADF has trouble feeding documents, clean the ADF pickup roller assembly.
1.
ENWW
Open the ADF cover.
Clean the device 157
2.
Wipe the ADF rollers with a soft, dry cloth.
3.
Close the ADF cover.
NOTE: If you are experiencing jams in the ADF, contact your dealer.
Clean the paper path
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Print Quality.
3.
Touch Calibration/Cleaning.
4.
Touch Create Cleaning Page.
The device prints a cleaning page.
5.
Follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page.
158 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
Calibrate the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF
and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the
position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated
and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the
document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Troubleshooting.
3.
Touch Calibrate Scanner and then follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
The device starts the calibration process, and Calibrating appears on the touchscreen status line
until the process is complete.
ENWW
Calibrate the scanner 159
160 Chapter 10 Manage and maintain the device
ENWW
11 Problem solving
This troubleshooting information is organized to help you resolve printing problems. Choose the general
topic or type of problem from the following list.
ENWW
●
Problem-solving checklist
●
Problem-solving flowchart
●
Solve general printing problems
●
Control-panel message types
●
Control-panel messages
●
Common causes of jams
●
Jam locations
●
Jam recovery
●
Clear jams
●
Clear staple jams
●
Solve print-quality problems
●
Solve network printing problems
●
Solve fax problems
●
Solve copy problems
●
Solve e-mail problems
●
Solve common Windows problems
●
Solve common Macintosh problems
●
Solve Linux problems
●
Solve PostScript problems
161
Problem-solving checklist
If you are experiencing problems, use the following checklist to identify the cause of the problem:
●
Is the device connected to power?
●
Is the device on?
●
Is the device in the Ready state?
●
Are all necessary cables connected?
●
Do any messages appear on the control panel?
●
Are genuine HP supplies installed?
●
Was a recently replaced print cartridge installed correctly, and was the pull tab and/or attached
tape on the cartridge removed?
For additional information about installation and setup, see the getting started guide.
If you cannot find solutions to problems in this guide, contact your dealer.
Factors that affect performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
●
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)
●
Device processing and download time
●
The complexity and size of graphics
●
The speed of the computer you are using
●
The USB connection
●
The I/O configuration
●
The amount of memory installed
●
The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)
●
Device personality (PCL or PS)
NOTE: Although additional memory can resolve memory problems, improve how the device handles
complex graphics, and improve download times, it will not increase maximum printing speed (ppm).
162 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Problem-solving flowchart
Symptom
Check
Possible causes
Possible solutions
The control-panel display
is blank, no lights are lit,
and the device makes no
sounds from the motors.
Is the power on?
The power switch might be off.
1.
Make sure the device is plugged in
and the power switch is on.
2.
Test the power outlet by plugging
the device into an outlet that is
known to work.
The internal power supply might have
failed.
3.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
Several conditions can cause an error
message to appear.
1.
Follow the instructions on the
control panel to resolve the
problem.
2.
For more information, see Controlpanel messages on page 172.
3.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
The control panel
indicates an error.
Paper-feed problems
The power cord might be unplugged.
The power outlet might not be working
correctly.
Do error messages
appear on the controlpanel display?
Are the main features,
such as Copy and E-mail
on the touchscreen
inactive?
The scanner shipping lock might be in
the locked position.
Make sure the scanner shipping lock is
unlocked. The scanner lock is on the left
side of the device, underneath the
scanner.
Do jams occur frequently?
The media does not meet specifications.
1.
Make sure the media meets
specifications for the device. See
Select print media on page 66.
2.
Open all doors and trays and check
for jammed media. See Clear jams
on page 183.
3.
Make sure the print cartridge is
installed correctly. See Change the
print cartridge on page 152.
4.
Install the device maintenance kit.
See Perform preventive
maintenance on page 155.
5.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
The original document might be printed
on media that is too light or too heavy for
the ADF.
1.
If the original document is printed
on very heavy or light media, copy
by using the flatbed glass.
The ADF rollers and separation pad
might be dirty.
2.
Clean the ADF rollers and
separation pad. See Clean the
ADF on page 157.
3.
Install the ADF maintenance kit.
See Perform preventive
maintenance on page 155.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
Paper remains in the device after
clearing a previous jam.
Some of the shipping tape, cardboard, or
shipping locks are still in the device.
The maintenance kit items might be
ready for replacement.
Do original documents
feed correctly through the
ADF?
The ADF maintenance kit parts might
need to be replaced.
ENWW
Problem-solving flowchart 163
Symptom
Check
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Copy problems
Are copies blank?
The originals might have been loaded
upside-down.
1.
In the ADF, load original
documents face-up.
2.
On the scanner glass, load original
documents face-down.
3.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
Are copies of poor quality
from the ADF and the
scanner glass?
The copy settings need to be adjusted
for the original document.
See Adjust the copy settings
on page 115.
If the problem persists, contact your
dealer.
Are copies of poor quality
only from the ADF?
The ADF glass strip might be dirty.
Clean the glass strip that is to the left of
the scanner glass. See Clean the device
on page 156.
If the problem persists, contact your
dealer.
Are copies of poor quality
only from the scanner
glass?
The scanner glass might be dirty
Clean the scanner glass. See Clean the
device on page 156.
If the problem persists, contact your
dealer.
Print-quality problems
General printing problems
Is the overall print quality
poor?
The media does not meet specifications. 1.
Is the printing too light?
The print cartridge might be empty or
damaged.
Do lines, streaks, or dots
appear on the pages?
The maintenance kit items might be
ready for replacement.
Can you print documents
from a computer?
The computer cable might be defective.
Make sure the media meets
specifications for the device. See
Select print media on page 66.
2.
Replace the print cartridge. See
Change the print cartridge
on page 152
3.
Install the device maintenance kit.
See Perform preventive
maintenance on page 155.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
1.
Try printing a configuration page at
the control panel. Touch Network
Address and then touch Print.
The printer driver might need to be
reinstalled.
If the page prints, the problem is
with the cable or the driver.
164 Chapter 11 Problem solving
2.
Reconnect the cables.
3.
Reinstall the printer driver.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
ENWW
Symptom
Check
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Can you print over the
network?
The network might not be configured
correctly.
1.
Try connecting the computer
directly to the device. If you can
print, the problem is with the
network configuration. See Solve
network printing problems
on page 214.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
1.
Try printing from a different
software program. If you can print,
the problem is with the original
software program.
2.
See the documentation for the
software program.
1.
Remove the staple cassette and
check if it is jammed or empty. See
Clear staple jams on page 198.
2.
For copy jobs, select the Staple/
Collate option at the control panel.
Are you having problems
printing from specific
software programs?
Stapling problems
Are jobs stapled?
The problem might be with the software
program.
The staple cassette might be jammed.
The staple cassette might need to be
replaced.
The job might not be configured for
stapling.
For print jobs, make sure the
stapler/stacker is configured in the
printer driver.
You might be using a paper size that is
not supported for stapling.
Are the staples holding
the pages together?
You might be using staples that are not
made for this device.
The job might have too many pages for
stapling.
Are the staples in the
correct location?
Stacking problems
ENWW
Are pages skewed?
You might need to change the page
orientation for the job.
The jam-access door might not be
closed completely.
3.
Use only Letter- or A4-size paper
for staple jobs.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
1.
Replace the staple cartridge with a
staple cartridge that is made for this
device.
2.
The stapler supports jobs that have
30 or fewer pages, or a 3 mm stack
height.
3.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
1.
For print jobs, adjust the page
layout in the software program.
2.
For copy jobs, load the document
into the ADF with the long-edge
feeding first. See Load media into
the input trays on page 71.
3.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
1.
Make sure all the doors on the left
side of the device are closed
completely.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
Problem-solving flowchart 165
Symptom
Check
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Are the pages stacked
neatly?
The paper might not meet specifications
for the device.
1.
Use paper that meets
specifications. See Select print
media on page 66
2.
Store media in an area that meets
specifications. See Operating
environment on page 238.
3.
Try using paper from an unopened
ream.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
The paper might be stored in an
environment that does not meet
specifications.
E-mail problems
Are you able to send email attachments?
The SMTP gateway might need to be
reconfigured.
See Solve e-mail problems
on page 221.
The device might be configured so that
the “From” e-mail address cannot be
changed.
Use the embedded Web server to
change these settings. See Use the
embedded Web server on page 145.
Does an “E-mail gateway
not responding” message
appear on the control
panel?
Are you able to change
the “From” e-mail
address?
The device might require you to sign in
before you can change the “From” e-mail
address.
Are you able to change
the file type or the color
setting for e-mail
attachments?
Do you receive a “job
failed” e-mail message
when you try to send an email attachment?
Change the settings at the control panel
or by using the embedded Web server.
The e-mail address to which you are
sending the document might be
incorrect.
1.
At the control panel, touch E-mail,
and then touch More Options. See
Change e-mail settings for the
current job on page 131.
2.
To change the settings by using the
embedded Web server, see Use
the embedded Web server
on page 145.
1.
Send a test e-mail from your
computer.
2.
Use the embedded Web server to
change the maximum allowable
size for e-mail attachments. See
Use the embedded Web server
on page 145.
1.
At the control panel, touch
Administration, touch Initial Setup,
and touch Fax Setup.
2.
Configure the settings for Location,
Date/Time, and Fax Header.
The file size might be larger than the
maximum allowable size for the SMTP
gateway.
Fax problems
Is the Fax feature on the
control panel inactive?
166 Chapter 11 Problem solving
You need to provide required settings
before using the Fax feature.
ENWW
Symptom
Check
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Is the Fax feature on the
control panel completely
missing?
The fax accessory might be installed
incorrectly.
1.
Make sure the fax accessory is
installed correctly and that none of
the pins are bent. See Install the fax
accessory on page 134.
2.
Print a configuration page and
check the modem status. It should
indicate “Operational/Enabled”. If
the modem status is anything else,
the problem is with the fax
accessory.
Is the Fax feature
configured correctly but
you cannot send faxes?
You must use the phone cord that came
with the device.
The phone cord might not be connected
securely or the telephone line might not
be working.
You might have connected the device to
a digital phone line instead of an analog
phone line. The fax accessory requires
an analog phone line.
Is the Fax feature
configured correctly but
you cannot receive faxes?
A line splitter or surge-protection device
might be interfering with incoming faxes.
An answering machine or voice-mail
system might be intercepting the
incoming fax transmission.
ENWW
See Solve fax problems on page 215.
1.
Always use the phone cord that
came with the device.
2.
Test the telephone line by
connecting a telephone to it and
making a call.
3.
Make sure you are connecting the
device to an analog phone line.
See Solve fax problems on page 215.
1.
Do not use line splitters or surgeprotection devices.
2.
Disconnect the answering machine
or voice-mail system.
3.
Set the number of rings-to-answer
for the fax accessory to a lower
number. See Initial Setup menu
on page 30.
4.
Make sure the device is connected
to a dedicated analog phone line.
Do not use a roll-over line.
Problem-solving flowchart 167
Solve general printing problems
Device selects media from the wrong tray.
Cause
Solution
The tray selection in the software program might be incorrect.
For many software programs, the paper tray selection is found
on the Page Setup menu within the program.
Check tray type and size configurations at the control panel.
For Macintosh computers, use the HP Printer Utility to change
the priority of the tray.
The configured size and type do not match the size and type
of the media that is loaded in the tray.
Through the control panel, change the configured size and
type to match the size and type of the media that is loaded in
the tray.
Device does not pull paper from tray.
Cause
Solution
The tray is empty.
Load paper in the tray.
The paper guides are set incorrectly.
To set the guides correctly, see Load media into the input trays
on page 71.
Make sure that the leading edge of the paper stack in the tray
is even. An uneven edge can prevent the lift plate from rising.
Paper curls when it exits the device.
Cause
Solution
The paper curls when it exits to the top output bin.
Turn over the paper that you are printing on.
Reduce the fusing temperature to reduce the curling. (See
Print Quality menu on page 46)
Print job is extremely slow.
Cause
Solution
The job might be very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the printquality settings. If this problem occurs frequently, add memory
to the device.
The maximum speed of the device cannot be exceeded even
when more memory is added.
Printing speeds might be automatically reduced when printing
on custom-sized media.
Note: Slower speeds are expected when printing on narrow
paper or rotated paper, when printing from tray 1, or when the
fuser mode is adjusted for certain types of media.
168 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Print job is extremely slow.
Cause
Solution
You are printing a PDF or PostScript (PS) file but are using a
PCL device driver.
Try using the PS device driver rather than the PCL device
driver. (You can usually do this from a software program.)
In the device driver, Optimize for: is set to cardstock, heavy,
rough, or bond paper.
In the device driver, set the type to plain paper (see Control
print jobs on page 86).
NOTE: If you change the setting to plain paper, the print job
will print faster. However, if you are using heavy media, for best
results leave the device driver set to heavy even though
printing might be slower.
Print job prints on both sides of the paper.
Cause
Solution
The device is set for duplexing.
See Open the printer drivers on page 11 to change the setting,
or see the online Help.
Print job contains only one page but the device processes the back side of the page as well (the page comes part of
the way out, and then goes back into the device).
Cause
Solution
The device is set for duplexing. Even if the print job contains
only one page, the device also processes the back side.
See Open the printer drivers on page 11 to change the setting,
or see the online Help.
Pages print, but are totally blank.
Cause
Solution
The sealing tape might still be on the print cartridge.
Remove the print cartridge and pull out the sealing tape.
Reinstall the print cartridge.
The file might have blank pages.
Check the file to make sure that it does not contain blank
pages.
The device prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.
ENWW
Cause
Solution
The device cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the device cable and reconnect it. Try a print job
that you know works. If possible, attach the cable and device
to another computer and try a print job that you know works.
Finally, try a new cable.
The device is on a network or sharing device and is not
receiving a clear signal.
Disconnect the device from the network and use USB cable to
attach it directly to a computer. Print a job that you know works.
The wrong driver was selected in the software.
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that
an HP LaserJet M5039XS device is selected.
The software program is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another program.
Solve general printing problems 169
The device does not respond when you select Print in the software.
Cause
Solution
The device is out of media.
Add media.
The device might be in the manual-feed mode.
Change the device from manual-feed mode.
The cable between the computer and the device is not
connected correctly.
Disconnect and reconnect the cable.
The device cable is defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer and print a
job that you know works. You might also try using a different
cable.
The wrong device was selected in the software.
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that
an HP LaserJet M5039XS device is selected.
The device might have a jam.
Clear any jams, paying careful attention to the duplexer area
(if your model has a duplexer). See Clear jams on page 183.
The software for the device is not configured for the device
port.
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that
it is using the correct port. If the computer has more than one
port, make sure that the device is attached to the correct one.
The device is on a network and is not receiving a signal.
Disconnect the device from the network and use a parallel or
USB cable to attach it directly to a computer. Reinstall the
printing software. Print a job that you know works.
Clear any stopped jobs from the print queue.
The device is not receiving power.
If no lights are on, check the power cord connections. Check
the power switch. Check the power source.
The device is malfunctioning.
Check the control-panel display for messages and lights to
determine if the device is indicating an error. Note any
message and see Control-panel messages on page 172.
170 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device.
Message type
Description
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal device operation
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the device changes. Whenever
the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready
appears if the device is online.
Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready or status messages and remain until you touch OK. Some warning messages are clearable.
If Clearable Warnings is set to Job on the device Device Behavior menu, the next print job clears
these messages.
Error messages
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing
a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If Auto Continue is set on the menus, the device will
continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the
auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop
button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.
Critical-error messages
ENWW
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the device off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto Continue setting.
If a critical error persists, service is required.
Control-panel message types 171
Control-panel messages
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
10.32.00 - Unauthorized Supply
A supply has been installed that does not
pass the authentication test for genuine HP
supplies.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, visit us at www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit. Any repair required as a result
of using non-HP supplies or unauthorized
supplies are not covered under warranty. HP
cannot ensure the accuracy or the availability
of certain features.
To continue printing, touch OK.
10.XX.YY Supply memory error
The device cannot read or write to the print
cartridge e-label, or the e-label is missing
from the print cartridge.
Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new
HP print cartridge.
11.XX - Internal clock error To continue
touch OK
The device real time clock has experienced
an error.
Whenever the device is turned off and then
turned on again, set the time and date at the
control panel. See Time/Scheduling menu
on page 27.
If the error persists, you might need to replace
the formatter.
13.XX.YY - Jam in Tray 1
Media is jammed in tray 1.
Remove the jammed media from tray 1.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the tray 1 input
area on page 193.
13.XX.YY - Jam in Tray X
Media is jammed in the specified tray.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the input areas
of trays 2 and 3 on page 193 or Clear jams
from the input areas of optional trays
on page 195.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside duplexer
Media is jammed in the duplexer.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the optional
duplexer on page 189.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside left door
Media is jammed inside the left door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the stapler/
stacker on page 186.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside lower-left door
Media is jammed inside the lower-left door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the output path
on page 188.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside lower-right door
Media is jammed inside the lower-right door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the input areas
of optional trays on page 195.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside middle-right door
Media is jammed inside the middle-right door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the input areas
of trays 2 and 3 on page 193.
13.XX.YY - Jam inside upper-right door
Media is jammed inside the upper-right door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear jams from the printcartridge area on page 191.
13.XX.YY - Paper wrapped around fuser
A jam has occurred because paper has
wrapped around the fuser.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box.
172 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
13.XX.YY - Stapler jam inside stapler door A jam has occurred inside the stapler door.
Recommended action
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box, or see Clear staple jams on page 198.
20 Insufficient memory To continue touch The device received more data than can fit in Touch OK to print the transferred data (some
OK
the available memory. You might have tried data might be lost), and then simplify the print
to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or
job or install additional memory.
complex graphics.
21 Page too complex To continue touch
OK
The page formatting process was not fast
enough for the device.
Touch OK to print the transferred data. (Some
data might be lost.) If this message appears
often, simplify the print job.
22 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue
touch OK
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in
the specified slot (X). An incorrect
communications protocol might be in use.
Touch OK to print the transferred data. (Some
data might be lost.)
22 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To
continue touch OK
Too much data was sent to the embedded
HP Jetdirect print server.
Touch OK to print the transferred data. (Some
data might be lost.)
22 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue
touch OK
Too much data was sent to the USB buffer.
Touch OK to clear the error message. (Data
will be lost.)
30.1.YY Scanner failure
An error has occurred in the scanner.
Turn the device off and then on.
Check the host configuration. If this message
persists, contact your dealer.
Make sure the scanner lock is in the unlocked
position.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
40 Bad serial transmission To continue
touch OK
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line
Touch OK to clear the error message. (Data
overrun) occurred as data was being sent by will be lost.)
the computer.
40 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue The connection between the device and the
touch OK
EIO card in the specified slot has been
broken.
Touch OK to clear the error message and
continue printing.
40 Embedded I/O bad transmission To
continue touch OK
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
A temporary printing error has occurred.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
41.3 - Load tray <XX> To use another tray, The specified tray does not contain the
touch OK
specified media size.
Touch OK to use a tray that contains media
of the correct size.
41.3 - Load tray <XX>: <Type>, <Size>
The specified tray is loaded with media that
is longer or shorter in the feed direction than
the size configured for the tray.
Touch OK to display Tray <X> Size.
Reconfigure the size in a tray so that the
device will use a tray that is loaded with the
size of media required for the print job. If the
message does not clear automatically from
the control-panel display, turn the device off,
and then turn the device on.
41.X Error To continue touch OK
A temporary printing error occurred.
Touch OK to clear the error. If the error is not
cleared, turn the device off, and then turn the
device on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
49.XXXXX ERROR To continue turn off
then on
A critical firmware error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 173
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
50.X FUSER ERROR To continue turn off
then on
A fuser error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
51.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
52.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
53.XY.ZZ CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT <X> To A problem exists with the device memory.
continue turn off then on
The DIMM that caused the error will not be
used.
You might need to reinstall or replace the
DIMM.
Turn the device off, and then replace the
DIMM. See Installing printer memory
on page 251.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
54.XX ERROR
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR To
continue turn off then on
The print engine is not communicating with
the formatter.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
56.XX ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
57.X ERROR To continue turn off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
58.XX ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
59.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn off then
on
A problem exists with the device firmware.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
64 ERROR To continue turn off then on
A scan buffer error occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
174 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
68.X Permanent storage full
The device NVRAM is full. Some settings
saved in the NVRAM might have been reset
to the factory defaults. Printing can continue,
but some unexpected functions might occur
if an error occurred in permanent storage.
Touch OK to clear the message. If the
message is not cleared, turn the device off,
and then turn the device on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
68.X Permanent storage write fail
The device NVRAM is failing to write. Printing Touch OK to clear the message. If the
can continue, but some unexpected functions message is not cleared, turn the device off,
might occur if an error occurred in permanent and then turn the device on.
storage.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
68.X Storage error settings changed To
continue touch OK
One or more device settings are invalid and
have been reset to the factory-default
settings. Printing can continue, but some
unexpected functions might occur if an error
occurred in permanent storage.
Touch OK to clear the message. If the
message is not cleared, turn the device off,
and then turn the device on.
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
69.X ERROR To continue turn off then on
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
79.XXXX ERROR To continue turn off then A critical hardware error occurred.
on
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
8X.YYYY EIO ERROR To continue turn off
then on
8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR
To continue turn off then on
The EIO accessory card has encountered a
critical error, as specified by YYYY.
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has
encountered a critical error, as specified by
YYYY.
Try the following actions to clear the
message.
1.
Turn the device off, and then turn the
device on.
2.
Turn the device off, reinstall the EIO
accessory, and then turn the device on.
3.
Replace the EIO accessory.
Turn the device off, and then turn the device
on.
If this message persists, contact your dealer.
Access denied menus locked
The control panel function that you are trying Contact the network administrator.
to use has been locked to prevent
unauthorized access.
Action not currently available for Tray <X> A duplexed (2-sided) document was
Tray size cannot be any size/any custom requested from a tray that is set to Any size
or Any custom. Duplexing is not allowed
from a tray configured to Any size or Any
custom.
Select another tray or reconfigure the tray.
Authentication Required
Authentication has been enabled for this
feature or destination. A username and
password are required.
Type the user name and password, or contact
the network administrator.
Authentication Required To Use This
Feature
A user name and password are required.
Type the user name and password, or contact
the network administrator.
Bad duplexer connection
The duplex printing accessory is not
connected correctly to the device.
Remove and reinstall the duplexer.
If the message persists contact your dealer.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 175
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Chosen personality not available To
continue touch OK
A print job requested a language (personality)
that is not available for this device. The job
will not print and will be cleared from
memory.
Print the job by using a printer driver for a
different printer language, or add the
requested language to the device (if
possible). To see a list of available
personalities, print a configuration page.
See Use information pages on page 142.
Digital send communication error
An error has occurred during a digital send
task.
Contact the network administrator.
Document feeder cover open
The document feeder (ADF) cover is open.
Close the document feeder (ADF) cover.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box.
Document feeder empty
The document feeder (ADF) does not contain
paper.
Load paper in the document feeder (ADF)
input tray.
Document feeder paper jam
Media is jammed in the document feeder
(ADF).
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box. See Clear jams from the automatic
document feeder (ADF) on page 183.
Document feeder pick error
The document feeder (ADF) experienced an
error while picking media.
Make sure that your original contains no more
than 50 pages. Follow the instructions in the
onscreen dialog box.
E-mail Gateway did not accept the job
because the attachment was too large.
The scanned documents have exceeded the
size limit of the server.
Send the job again using a lower resolution,
smaller file size setting, or fewer pages.
See Use the embedded Web server
on page 145 to learn how to reduce the size
of the attachment. Contact the network
administrator to enable sending the scanned
documents by using multiple e-mails.
E-mail Gateway did not respond. Job
failed.
A gateway has exceeded the time out value.
Validate the SMTP IP address. See Solve
e-mail problems on page 221.
E-mail Gateway rejected the job because
of the addressing information. Job failed.
One or more of the e-mail addresses is
incorrect.
Send the job again with the correct
addresses.
Error executing Digital Send job. Job
failed.
A digital send job has failed and cannot be
delivered.
Try to send the job again.
Folder list is full. To add a folder, you must
first delete a folder.
The device limits the number of folders that
can be established.
Delete an unused folder to add a new folder.
HP digital sending: delivery error
A digital send job has failed and cannot be
delivered.
Send the job again.
Insert or close tray <XX>
The specified tray is missing or open.
Insert or close the specified tray to continue.
Install black cartridge
The print cartridge has been removed or has
been installed incorrectly.
Replace or reinstall the print cartridge
correctly to continue printing.
Insufficient memory to load fonts/data
<device> To continue touch OK
The device does not have enough memory to
load the data (for example, fonts or macros)
from the location specified.
Touch OK to continue without this
information. If the message persists, add
more memory.
176 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Jam in document feeder
Media is jammed in the document feeder
(ADF).
Remove jammed media from the document
feeder (ADF). Follow the instructions in the
onscreen dialog box, or see Clear jams from
the automatic document feeder (ADF)
on page 183.
If the message persists after all jams have
been cleared, a sensor might be stuck or
broken. Contact your dealer.
LDAP server is not responding. Contact
administrator.
The LDAP server has exceeded the time out Verify the LDAP server address. See Solve
e-mail problems on page 221. Contact the
value for an address request.
network administrator.
Load Tray 1: <type>, <size>
The tray is empty or configured for a different
size than the size requested.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box.
Manually feed: <type>, <size>
The specified job requires manual feed from
tray 1.
Load the requested media into tray 1.
To override the message, touch OK to use a
type and size of media that is available in
another tray.
Network connection required for digital
sending. Contact administrator.
A digital-sending feature has been
configured, but a network connection is not
detected.
Verify the network connection. See Solve
network printing problems on page 214.
Contact the network administrator.
Non HP supply installed Economode
disabled
A non-HP supply or a refilled HP supply has
been installed.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box.
Novell Login Required
Novell authentication has been enabled for
this destination.
Enter Novell network credentials to access
the copy and fax features.
Order black cartridge
The number of pages remaining for the print Touch OK to continue printing until the print
cartridge has reached the low threshold. The cartridge is out of toner.
device was set to stop printing when a supply
To order a new print cartridge, contact your
needs to be ordered.
dealer.
Order staple cartridge
Fewer than 20 staples remain in the staple
cartridge. Printing can continue.
Contact your dealer to order a new staple
cartridge.
Output bin <X> full
The specified output bin is full, and printing
cannot continue.
Empty the bin to continue printing.
Output paper path open
The stapler door is open and must be closed Make sure the staple cartridge is snapped
before printing can continue.
into position and that the stapler door is
closed.
Password or name is incorrect. Please
enter correct login.
The user name or password was typed
incorrectly.
Retype the user name and password.
PIN is incorrect. Please enter a 4-digit PIN.
The PIN format is incorrect.
Type the 4-digit PIN.
PIN is incorrect. Please re-enter PIN.
The PIN was typed incorrectly.
Retype the PIN.
Please turn device off and install hard
disk.
The requested job requires a hard disk, but
the device does not have a hard disk
installed.
Turn the device off and install a hard disk.
Reinsert duplexer
The duplexer has been removed and must be Reinsert the duplexer in the device.
reinstalled.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 177
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Replace black cartridge
The print cartridge is out of toner. Printing
cannot continue because damage to the
device might result.
Replace the print cartridge. See Change the
print cartridge on page 152.
NOTE: Depending on how the device is
configured, this message might appear when
it is time to order a new print cartridge. In this
case, the message indicates that you can
touch OK to continue printing.
Replace black cartridge To continue
touch OK
The print cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the print cartridge. (See Change the
print cartridge on page 152.)
Replace staple cartridge
The stapler is out of staples.
Replace the staple cartridge. Load staples
on page 89. For information about ordering a
new staple cartridge, contact your dealer.
Resend stapler/stacker firmware
A problem occurred while updating the
firmware for the stapler/stacker.
Send the upgrade again.
Sanitizing disk <X>% complete Do not
power off
The hard disk is being cleaned.
Contact the network administrator.
Scan failure Press Start to rescan
The scan was unsuccessful and the
document needs to be rescanned.
If necessary, reposition the document to
rescan it, and then press Start.
SMTP gateway not responding
The SMTP gateway has exceeded a time out Verify the e-mail server address. See Solve
e-mail problems on page 221. Contact the
value.
network administrator.
The digital sending service at <IP
Address> does not service this MFP.
Contact administrator.
The device cannot communicate with the
specified IP address.
Verify the IP address. Contact the network
administrator.
The digital sending service must be
upgraded to support this version of the
MFP firmware. Contact administrator.
The digital sending service is not supported
by the device firmware version that is
currently installed.
Check the firmware version. Contact the
network administrator.
The folder you have entered is not a valid The folder name was entered incorrectly, or
folder.
the folder does not exist.
Re-enter the folder name correctly, or add the
folder.
Too many pages in job to staple
The maximum number of sheets the stapler
can staple is 30.
For print jobs that have more than 30 pages,
staple them manually.
Unable to connect
A network connection is not detected.
Verify the network connection. Contact the
network administrator.
Unable to copy
The device was unable to copy the document. To temporarily hide this message in order to
If this message persists, contact your dealer. fax or send to e-mail, touch Hide.
Unable to send
A network connection is not detected.
Verify the network connection. Contact the
network administrator.
Unable to send fax. Please check fax
configuration.
The device is unable to send a fax job.
Contact the network administrator.
Unable to send job
The device is unable to send a job.
To temporarily hide this message in order to
send e-mail, touch Hide. If this message
persists, contact your dealer.
Unable to store job
The device is unable to store a job.
To temporarily hide this message in order to
fax or send to e-mail, touch Hide. If this
message persists, contact your dealer.
178 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Table 11-1 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
User name or password is incorrect.
Please re-enter.
The user name or password was typed
incorrectly.
Retype the user name and password.
User name, job name, or PIN is missing.
One or more of the required items has not
been selected or typed.
Select the correct user name and job name,
and type the correct PIN.
ENWW
Control-panel messages 179
Common causes of jams
The device is jammed.
1
Cause
Solution
The media does not meet specifications.
Use only media that meets HP specifications. See Media and
trays on page 59.
A component is installed incorrectly.
Verify that the print cartridge is correctly installed.
You are using media that has already passed through a device
or copier.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or
copied.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.
Remove any excess media from the input tray. Make sure that
the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray.
See Load media into the input trays on page 71.
The media is skewed.
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them
so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.
The media is binding or sticking together.
Remove the media, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload
the media into the input tray.
The media is removed before it settles into the output bin.
Reset the device. Wait until the page completely settles in the
output bin before removing it.
During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the
second side of the document was printed.
Reset the device and print the document again. Wait until the
page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
The media is in poor condition.
Replace the media.
The internal tray rollers are not picking up the media.
If the media is heavier than 163 g/m2 (43 lb), it might not be
picked from the tray.
The media has rough or jagged edges.
Replace the media.
The media is perforated or embossed.
Perforated or embossed media does not separate easily. Feed
single sheets from tray 1.
Device supply items have reached the end of their useful life.
Check the device control panel for messages prompting you
to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the
remaining life of the supplies. See Use information pages
on page 142.
Paper was not stored correctly.
Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the
original packaging in a controlled environment.
Not all device packing material was removed.
Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping
locks have been removed from the device.
If the device still continues to jam, contact your dealer.
180 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Jam locations
Use this illustration to troubleshoot jams in the device. For instructions about clearing jams, see Clear
jams on page 183.
ENWW
1
ADF
See Clear jams from the automatic document feeder
(ADF) on page 183.
2
Stapler/stacker
See Clear jams from the stapler/stacker on page 186
for media jams or see Clear staple jams on page 198
for staple jams.
3
Output path
See Clear jams from the output path on page 188.
4
Duplex path (for two-sided printing)
See Clear jams from the optional duplexer
on page 189.
5
Stapler/stacker output bin
See Clear jams from the stapler/stacker on page 186.
6
Output bin
See Clear jams from the output path on page 188.
7
Print cartridge
See Clear jams from the print-cartridge area
on page 191.
8
Input trays
See Clear jams from the tray 1 input area
on page 193 and Clear jams from the input areas of
trays 2 and 3 on page 193.
9
Optional input trays
See Clear jams from the input areas of optional trays
on page 195.
Jam locations 181
Jam recovery
The device has a jam-recovery feature that determines if the device will reprint jammed pages after the
jam is cleared.
●
Auto instructs the device to automatically turn jam recovery on when sufficient device memory.
●
Off instructs the device not to attempt to reprint jammed pages. This setting helps conserve device
memory.
●
On instructs the device to reprint any page that was involved in a paper jam after the jam has been
cleared.
NOTE: During the recovery process, the device might reprint pages that were printed before the jam
occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable the jam recovery.
Turn off jam recovery
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2.
Touch Device Behavior.
3.
Touch Warning/Error Behavior.
4.
Touch Jam Recovery.
5.
Touch Off.
6.
Touch Save.
182 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Clear jams
When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear the media. If a small piece of media remains in the device,
it could cause additional jams.
Clear jams from the automatic document feeder (ADF)
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a fax, copy, or scan job. When this happens, the controlpanel message Jam in document feeder alerts you to the jam. To clear the jam, follow the instructions
on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps below.
ENWW
1.
Open the ADF cover.
2.
If you were copying two-sided documents, lift the green lever to open the reversing unit, and then
remove any media from inside the reversing unit.
Clear jams 183
3.
Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. Also pull paper from the ADF output bin. If you feel
resistance, go to the next step.
4.
Turn the green wheel to advance the media out of the ADF.
5.
Close the ADF cover. If you were not able to remove all of the jammed media, continue to the next
step.
184 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
ENWW
6.
Open the ADF lid and gently loosen the media by using both hands.
7.
When the media is free, gently pull it out in the direction shown.
8.
Close the lid to the flatbed scanner.
Clear jams 185
Clear jams from the stapler/stacker
The control-panel message 13.XX.YY Jam inside left door on the HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP alerts
you to a jam in the stapler/stacker. To clear the jam, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box
or follow the steps below.
1.
If the most of the jammed media is visible exiting the device into the stapler/stacker output bin,
grasp both sides of the media and slowly pull the media out of the device.
NOTE: If media is jammed in the stapler/stacker, but most of the media is still inside the device,
it is better to remove it through upper-left door.
2.
Open the upper-left door.
3.
Press the green bar to release any jammed media and look for jammed media inside the device.
186 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
4.
Grasp both sides of the media, and slowly pull the media out of the device.
5.
Close the upper-left door door. Make sure that both sides of the door snap into place.
If a jam message persists, there is still media in the device. Look for media in other locations.
ENWW
Clear jams 187
Clear jams from the output path
To clear jams in output path, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps below.
The following control-panel messages alert you to jams in the output path:
●
13.XX.YY Jam inside left door
●
13.XX.YY Jam inside lower-left door
1.
If the most of the jammed media is visible exiting the device into the output bin, grasp both sides
of the media and slowly pull the media out of the device.
NOTE: If media is jammed in the output bin, but most of the media is still inside the device, it is
better to remove it through jam-access door.
2.
Open the jam-access door.
188 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
3.
Grasp both sides of the media, and slowly pull the media out of the device. (There might be loose
toner on the media. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or into the device.)
NOTE: If media is difficult to remove, try opening the upper-right door and removing the print
cartridge to release pressure on the media.
4.
Close the jam access door.
If a jam message persists, there is still media in the device. Look for media in other locations.
Clear jams from the optional duplexer
The control-panel message 13.XX.YY Jam inside duplexer alerts you to a jam in the optional duplexer.
To clear the jam, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps below.
1.
ENWW
Remove the duplexer.
Clear jams 189
2.
Remove any media from the duplexer.
3.
Reinstall the duplexer.
190 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Clear jams from the print-cartridge area
The control-panel message 13.XX.YY Jam inside upper-right door alerts you to a jam in the printcartridge area. To clear the jam, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps
below.
1.
Open the jam access door.
2.
Open the upper-right door and remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes.
3.
ENWW
Lift the metal plate inside the device.
Clear jams 191
4.
Slowly pull the media out of the device. Be careful to not tear the media.
CAUTION: Avoid spilling loose toner. Use a dry, lint-free cloth, to clean any toner that might have
fallen into the device. If loose toner falls into the device, it might cause temporary problems with
print quality. Loose toner should clear from the paper path after a few pages are printed. If toner
gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot water sets
toner into fabric.)
5.
Replace the print cartridge, and then close the upper-right door.
6.
Close the jam access door.
If a jam message persists, there is still media in the device. Look for media in other locations.
192 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Clear jams from the input-tray areas
Clear jams from the tray 1 input area
The control-panel message 13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 1 alerts you to a jam in the tray 1 input area. To
clear the jam, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps below.
1.
If the edge of the media is visible in the feed area, slowly pull it out of the device.
2.
If the edge of the media is not visible, remove media from tray 1 and see Clear jams from the printcartridge area on page 191.
Clear jams from the input areas of trays 2 and 3
To clear jams in tray 2 and tray 3, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps
below. The following control-panel messages alert you to jams in trays 2 and 3:
ENWW
●
13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 2
●
13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 3
●
Jam inside lower-left door
●
Jam inside middle-left door
1.
Open the right-side access door. If the jammed page is visible, gently pull it out of the device.
2.
If you were not able to clear the jam by using the door, slide the tray out of the device, and remove
any damaged paper from the tray.
Clear jams 193
3.
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the left side and
then out of the device.
NOTE: Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing
it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the print-cartridge area.
4.
Close the door and slide the tray back into the device.
NOTE: Before replacing the tray, make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and
below the tabs on the guides.
NOTE: If you were not able to clear the jam from the input area, paper might be jammed in the printcartridge area. See Clear jams from the print-cartridge area on page 191.
If a jam message persists, there is still media in the device. Look for media in other locations.
194 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Clear jams from the input areas of optional trays
To clear jams in optional trays, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or follow the steps
below. The following control-panel messages alert you to jams in optional trays:
ENWW
●
13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 4
●
13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 5
●
13.XX.YY Jam in Tray 6
●
Jam inside middle-left door
●
Jam inside lower-left door
1.
Open the right-side access door. If the jam is in tray 5 or tray 6, also open the lower-right access
door. If the jammed page is visible, gently pull it out of the device.
2.
If you were not able to clear the jam by using the doors, slide the tray out of the device, and remove
any damaged paper from the tray.
Clear jams 195
3.
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the left side and out
of the device.
NOTE: Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing
it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the upper, right door.
4.
Close the doors and slide the tray back into the device.
NOTE: Before replacing the tray, make sure the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and
below the tabs on the guides.
NOTE: If you were not able to clear the jam from the input area, paper might be jammed in the printcartridge area. See Clear jams from the print-cartridge area on page 191.
If a jam message persists, there is still media in the device. Look for media in other locations.
196 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve repeated jams
If jams occur frequently, try the following actions:
ENWW
●
Check all the jam locations. A piece of media might be stuck somewhere in the device.
●
Check that media is correctly loaded in the trays, that the trays are correctly adjusted for the loaded
media size, and that the trays are not overfilled.
●
Check that all trays and paper-handling accessories are completely inserted into the device. (If a
tray is open during a print job, a jam might occur.)
●
Check that all covers and doors are closed. (If a cover or door is open during a print job, a jam
might occur.)
●
The sheets might be sticking together. Try bending the stack to separate each sheet. Do not fan
the stack.
●
If you are printing from tray 1, try feeding fewer sheets of media at a time.
●
If you are printing small sizes (such as index cards), make sure that the media is oriented correctly
in the tray.
●
Turn over the media stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
●
Try rotating media to feed through the device from a different orientation.
●
Check the media quality. Do not use damaged or irregular media.
●
Use only media that meets HP specifications. See Media and trays on page 59.
●
Do not use media that has already been used in a printer or copier. Do not print on both sides of
envelopes, transparencies, vellum, or labels.
●
Do not use media with staples or media that has had the staple removed. Staples can damage the
device and can void warranty.
●
Make sure that the power supplied to the device is steady and meets specifications. See
Specifications on page 235.
●
Clean the device. See Clean the device on page 156.
●
Contact your dealer to perform routine maintenance.
Clear jams 197
Clear staple jams
To reduce the risk of staple jams, make sure that you staple 30 or fewer pages of media (80 g/m2 or
20 lb) at a time.
The control-panel message 13.XX.YY Stapler jam inside stapler door on the HP LaserJet M5039XS
MFP alerts you to a staple jam. To clear the jam, follow the instructions on the onscreen dialog box or
follow the steps below.
1.
Open the stapler door.
2.
Lift up the green handle on the staple cartridge to dislodge it and then pull the cartridge out of the
device.
3.
Clear any loose staples from the stapler and from the staple cassette.
198 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
ENWW
4.
Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
5.
Remove the staples that protrude from the staple cartridge.
6.
Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
7.
Insert the staple cartridge into the opening inside the stapler door and then press the green handle
down.
Clear staple jams 199
8.
Close the stapler door.
9.
Test the stapler by printing or copying a staple job.
Repeat steps these steps, if necessary.
200 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve print-quality problems
This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print- quality
problems can be handled easily by making sure that the device is correctly maintained, using print media
that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.
Print-quality problems associated with media
Some print-quality problems arise from the use of inappropriate media.
●
Use media that meets HP specifications. See Media and trays on page 59.
●
The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP specifications. See Media and
trays on page 59.
●
The moisture content is uneven, too high, or too low. Use media from a different source or from an
unopened ream.
●
Some areas of the media reject toner. Use media from a different source or from an unopened
ream.
●
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough media. Use a smoother, xerographic media. If this
solves your problem, ask the supplier of your letterhead to use media that meets the specifications
for this device. See Media and trays on page 59.
●
The media is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic media.
●
The driver setting is incorrect. To change the media type setting, see Control print jobs
on page 86.
●
The media that you are using is too heavy for the media type setting that you selected, and the
toner is not fusing to the media.
Print-quality problems associated with the environment
If the device is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is
within specifications. See Operating environment on page 238.
Print-quality problems associated with jams
Make sure that all sheets are cleared from the paper path. See Clear jams on page 183.
●
If the device recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the device.
●
If the sheets do not pass through the fuser and cause image defects on subsequent documents,
print three pages to clean the device. If the problem persists, print and process a cleaning page.
See Clean the device on page 156.
Image defect examples
Use the examples in this image-defect table to determine which print-quality problem you are
experiencing, and then see the corresponding reference pages to resolve the problem. These examples
identify the most common print-quality problems. If you still have problems after trying the suggested
remedies, contact your dealer.
ENWW
Solve print-quality problems 201
See Light print (partial
page) on page 203
See Light print (entire
page) on page 204
See Specks
on page 205
See Specks
on page 205
See Dropouts
on page 205
See Gray
background
on page 206
See Toner smear
on page 207
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
See Dropouts
on page 205
See Dropouts
on page 205
See Lines
on page 206
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk
ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj
hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this
is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,
and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk
sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj
shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as
sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana
l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k
v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k
w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
See Loose toner
on page 207
202 Chapter 11 Problem solving
See Repeating
defects on page 208
See Repeating image
on page 208
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
See Misformed
characters
on page 209
See Page skew
on page 209
ENWW
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
See Curl or wave
on page 210
See Wrinkles or
creases on page 210
See Vertical white
lines on page 211
See Tire tracks
on page 211
See Scattered lines
on page 212.
See Blurred print
on page 212.
See Random image
repetition
on page 213 (dark)
See Random image
repetition
on page 213 (light)
See White spots on
black on page 211
NOTE: These examples depict letter-size media that has passed through the device.
Light print (partial page)
ENWW
1.
Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2.
The toner level in the print cartridge might be low. Replace the print cartridge.
3.
The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough).
See Media and trays on page 59.
Solve print-quality problems 203
Light print (entire page)
1.
Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2.
Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver.
3.
Open the Aministration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality menu and increase
the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
4.
Try using a different type of media.
5.
The print cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the print cartridge.
204 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Specks
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the device on page 156.
3.
Try using a different type of media.
4.
Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.
Dropouts
ENWW
1.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
2.
If the media is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the Administration menu at the device
control panel. Open the Print Quality menu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type
you are using. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
3.
Try using a smoother media.
Solve print-quality problems 205
Lines
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the device on page 156.
3.
Replace the print cartridge.
Gray background
1.
Do not use media that has already been run through the device.
2.
Try using a different type of media.
3.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
4.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
5.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality menu, increase the
Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
7.
Replace the print cartridge.
206 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Toner smear
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Try using a different type of media.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
4.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the device on page 156.
5.
Replace the print cartridge.
Also see Loose toner on page 207.
Loose toner
Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.
ENWW
1.
If media is heavy or rough, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print
Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you are using.
2.
If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your media, try printing on the smoother
side.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
4.
Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media and
trays on page 59.
Solve print-quality problems 207
Repeating defects
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
If the distance between defects is 47 mm (1.9 in), 62 mm (2.4 in), or 96 mm (3.8 in), the print
cartridge might need to be replaced.
3.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the device on page 156.)
Also see Repeating image on page 208.
Repeating image
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk
ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj
hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this
is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,
and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk
sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj
shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as
sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana
l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k
v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k
w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow media.
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media and
trays on page 59.
3.
If the distance between defects is 47 mm (1.9 in), 62 mm (2.4 in), or 96 mm (3.8 in), the print
cartridge might need to be replaced.
208 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Misformed characters
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
Page skew
ENWW
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Verify that no torn pieces of media are inside the device.
3.
Make sure that media is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. See Load
media into the input trays on page 71. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too
loose against the media.
4.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating
environment on page 238.)
7.
Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the
Print Quality submenu, touch Set Registration. Choose a tray under Source and then run a test
page. For more information, see Print Quality menu on page 46.
Solve print-quality problems 209
Curl or wave
1.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. (See Media
and trays on page 59.)
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating
environment on page 238.)
4.
Try printing to a different output bin.
5.
If media is lightweight and smooth, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On
the Print Quality submenu, touch Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you are using.
Change the setting to Low, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.
Wrinkles or creases
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
4.
Make sure that media is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. See Load media
into the input trays on page 71.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
6.
If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.
If the above actions do not improve wrinkles or creases, open the Administration menu at the device
control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you
are using. Change the setting to Low, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.
210 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Vertical white lines
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
3.
Replace the print cartridge.
Tire tracks
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life. For example, if you
are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage.
1.
Replace the print cartridge.
2.
Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.
White spots on black
ENWW
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
4.
Replace the print cartridge.
Solve print-quality problems 211
Scattered lines
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
4.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and
change the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
5.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, open
Optimize and set Line Detail=On.
Blurred print
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Media
and trays on page 59.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating
environment on page 238.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
4.
Do not use media that already has been run through the device.
5.
Decrease the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the
Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu
on page 46.
6.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, open
Optimize and set High Transfer=On. See Print Quality menu on page 46.
212 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Random image repetition
If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray
field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might
be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)
ENWW
●
Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.
●
Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top
of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.
●
From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.
●
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the device off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to
restart the print job.
Solve print-quality problems 213
Solve network printing problems
●
Print a configuration page (see Use information pages on page 142). If an HP Jetdirect print server
is installed, printing a configuration page also prints a second page that shows the network settings
and status.
●
See the HP Jetdirect Embedded Print Server Administrator's Guide for help and for more
information about the Jetdirect configuration page.
●
Try printing the job from another computer.
●
To verify that a device works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer,
and then reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed correctly
in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.
●
Contact a network administrator for assistance.
214 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve fax problems
Solve sending problems
Faxes quit during sending.
Cause
Solution
The fax machine to which you are sending might be
malfunctioning.
Send the fax to another fax machine.
Your telephone line might not be working.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then
connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the
telephone line is working.
The device fax is receiving faxes but is not sending them.
Cause
Solution
If the device is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be
generating a dial tone that the fax cannot detect.
Disable the detect dial tone setting. See the fax guide for
information about changing the setting.
There might be a poor telephone connection.
Resend the fax later.
The fax machine to which you are sending might be
malfunctioning.
Send the fax to another fax machine.
Your telephone line might not be working.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then
connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the
telephone line is working.
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing.
Cause
Solution
The fax automatically redials a fax number if either the Redial
on Busy feature or the Redial on No Answer feature is enabled.
Disable the Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer features.
See the fax guide for information about changing the settings.
Faxes you send are not arriving at the receiving fax machine.
ENWW
Cause
Solution
The receiving fax machine might be turned off or might have
an error condition, such as being out of paper.
Call the recipient to make sure that the fax machine is turned
on and ready to receive faxes.
A fax might be stored in memory because it is waiting to redial
a busy number, or there are other jobs ahead of it waiting to
be sent.
If a fax job is in memory for either of these reasons, an entry
for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log (see
the fax guide), and check the Result column for jobs with a
Pending designation.
Solve fax problems 215
Solve receiving problems
Incoming fax calls are not being answered by the fax (no fax detected).
Cause
Solution
The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly.
Check the rings-to-answer setting. See the fax guide for
information about changing the setting.
The telephone cord might not be connected properly, or the
telephone cord is not working.
Check the installation. Make sure you are using the telephone
cord that came with the device.
The telephone line might not be working.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then
connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the
telephone line is working.
A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the ability
to answer calls.
Do one of the following:
●
Discontinue the messaging service.
●
Get a telephone line dedicated to fax calls.
●
Decrease the rings-to-answer setting for the fax to a
number less than the rings-to-answer for the voice mail.
See the fax guide for information about changing the
setting.
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.
Cause
Solution
You might be sending or receiving a very complex fax, such as
one with many graphics.
Complex faxes take longer to be sent or received.
The receiving fax machine might have a slow modem speed.
The device fax only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed
the receiving fax machine can use.
The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received
is very high. A higher resolution typically results in better
quality, but also requires a longer transmission time.
If you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to decrease
the resolution and resend the fax. If you are sending, decrease
the resolution or change the Page Content mode setting. See
the fax guide for information about changing the settings.
A poor telephone-line connection is forcing the device fax and
the sending or receiving fax machine to slow down the
transmission to adjust for errors.
Cancel and resend the fax. Have the telephone company
check the telephone line.
Faxes are not printing at the device.
Cause
Solution
There is no media in the input trays.
Load media. Any faxes received while the input trays are empty
are stored and will print after the trays have been refilled.
The Schedule Printing of Faxes mode is enabled. Faxes will
not print until it is disabled
Disable the Schedule Printing of Faxes mode. See the fax
guide for information about changing the setting.
The device toner level is low, or it has run out of toner.
Replace the print cartridge.
The device stops printing as soon as it is low on toner or runs
out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and are
printed after the toner has been replaced.
216 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve copy problems
Prevent copy problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:
●
Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the
automatic document feeder (ADF).
●
Use quality originals.
●
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images
and problems with the OCR program. See Load media into the input trays on page 71 for
instructions.
●
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
NOTE: Verify that the media meets HP specifications. If the media meets HP specifications, recurring
feed problems indicate the pickup roller or separation pad is worn. Contact your dealer.
Image problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Images are missing or faded.
The print-cartridge toner-level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Change
the print cartridge on page 152.
The original might be of poor quality.
If your original is too light or damaged,
the copy might not be able to
compensate, even if you adjust the
darkness. If possible, find an original
document in better condition.
The original might have a colored
background.
Touch Copy, and then touch Image
Adjustment. Adjust the Background
Cleanup slider to the right to decrease
the background.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
See Media and trays on page 59.
The print-cartridge toner-level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Change
the print cartridge on page 152.
Tray 1 or tray 2 might not be installed
correctly.
Verify that the tray is in place.
The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass
might be dirty.
Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF
glass. See Clean the device
on page 156.
Vertical white or faded stripes appear on
the copy.
Unwanted lines appear on the copy.
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
Aa BbCc
ENWW
The photosensitive drum inside the print Install a new HP print cartridge. See
cartridge might have been scratched.
Change the print cartridge on page 152.
Solve copy problems 217
Problem
Cause
Solution
Black dots or streaks appear on the
copy.
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted
substance might be on the automatic
document feeder (ADF) or flatbed
scanner.
Clean the device. See Clean the device
on page 156.
Copies are too light or dark.
The darkness setting needs to be
adjusted.
Touch Copy, and then touch Image
Adjustment. Adjust the Darkness slider
to lighten or darken the image.
Text is unclear.
The sharpness setting needs to be
adjusted.
To adjust the sharpness, touch Copy,
and then touch Image Adjustment.
Adjust the Sharpness slider to the right to
increase the sharpness.
The image should be optimized for text.
To optimize the image for text, touch
Copy and then touch Optimize Text/
Picture. Select Text.
Media-handling problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Poor print quality or toner adhesion
The paper is too moist, too rough, too
heavy or too smooth, or it is embossed
or from a faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100
and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture
content.
Dropouts, jamming, or curl
The paper has been stored incorrectly.
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof
wrapping.
The paper has variability from one side
to the other.
Turn the paper over.
The paper is too moist, has the wrong
grain direction, or is of short-grain
construction
Try changing the fuser mode (see Select
the correct fuser mode on page 65 or use
long-grain paper.
The paper varies from side-to-side.
Turn the paper over.
Jamming, damage to device
The paper has cutouts or perforations.
Use paper that is free of cutouts or
perforations.
Problems with feeding
The paper has ragged edges.
Use high-quality paper that is made for
laser printers.
The paper varies from side-to-side.
Turn the paper over.
The paper is too moist, too rough, too
heavy or too smooth, has the wrong grain
direction, or is of short-grain construction
or it is embossed or from a faulty paper
lot.
●
Try another kind of paper, between
100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6%
moisture content.
●
Use long-grain paper.
Excessive curl
218 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Problem
Cause
Solution
Print is crooked or misaligned on the
page.
The media guides might be incorrectly
adjusted.
Remove all media from the input tray,
straighten the stack, and then load the
media in the input tray again. Adjust the
media guides to the width and length of
the media that you are using and try
printing again.
The scanner might require a calibration.
Perform a tray alignment and then
calibrate the scanner.
More than one sheet feeds at one time.
The device does not pull media from a
media tray.
ENWW
●
Perform a tray alignment by
opening the Administration menu at
the device control panel. On the
Print Qualitysubmenu, touch Set
Registration. Choose a tray under
Source and then run a test page.
For more information, see Print
Quality menu on page 46.
●
See Calibrate the scanner
on page 159 for information about
calibrating the scanner.
The media tray might be overloaded.
Remove some of the media from the tray.
See Load media into the input trays
on page 71.
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or
damaged.
Verify that the media is not wrinkled,
folded, or damaged. Try printing on
media from a new or different package.
The device might be in manual feed
mode.
●
If Manual Feed appears on the
control-panel display, press OK to
print the job.
●
Verify that the device is not in
manual feed mode, and then print
your job again.
The pickup roller might be dirty or
damaged.
Contact your dealer.
The paper-length adjustment control in
the tray is set at a length that is greater
than the media size.
Adjust the paper-length adjustment
control to the correct length.
Solve copy problems 219
Performance problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
No copy came out.
The input tray might be empty.
Load media in the device. SeeLoad
media into the input trays on page 71 for
more information.
The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
Load the original correctly in the ADF or
flatbed scanner. See Load media into the
input trays on page 71.
The sealing tape might not have been
removed from the print cartridge.
Remove the print cartridge from the
device, pull out the sealing tape, and
then reinstall the print cartridge.
The original might have been loaded
incorrectly.
Load the original correctly in the ADF or
flatbed scanner. See Load media into the
input trays on page 71.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
Use media that meets HP specifications.
See Media and trays on page 59.
The print-cartridge toner-level might be
low.
Replace the print cartridge. See Change
the print cartridge on page 152.
The wrong original was copied.
The ADF might be loaded.
Make sure that the ADF is empty.
Copies are reduced in size.
The device software settings might be
set to reduce the scanned image.
See the device software Help for more
information about changing the settings.
Copies are blank.
220 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve e-mail problems
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the
SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current
SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Use information pages on page 142. Use the following
procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.
Validate the SMTP gateway address
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
2.
Type telnet followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port
over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123 25 where
"123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.
3.
Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message Could
not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.
4.
If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
Validate the LDAP gateway address
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
ENWW
1.
Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP:// immediately followed by the LDAP
gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12 where "12.12.12.12" represents the
LDAP gateway address.
2.
Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.
3.
If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
Solve e-mail problems 221
Solve common Windows problems
Error message:
"General Protection FaultException OE"
"Spool32"
"Illegal Operation"
Cause
Solution
Close all software programs, restart Windows, and try again.
Select a different printer driver. If the device PCL 6 printer
driver is selected, switch to the PCL 5 or HP postscript level 3
emulation printer driver, which can be done from a software
program.
Delete all temp files from the Temp subdirectory. Determine
the name of the directory by opening the AUTOEXEC.BAT file
and looking for the statement "Set Temp =". The name after
this statement is the Temp directory. It is usually C:\TEMP by
default, but can be redefined.
See the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with the
computer for more information about Windows error
messages.
222 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve common Macintosh problems
In addition to the problems that are listed in Solve general printing problems on page 168, this section
lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.
NOTE: Setup for USB and IP printing is performed through the Desktop Printer Utility. The device
will not appear in the Chooser.
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The device software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the PPD is in the following hard drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language
code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the
software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the
language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting
started guide for instructions.
The device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer Setup
Utility.
Cause
Solution
The device might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on,
and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer, or use a
different port.
The wrong connection type might be selected.
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous is selected,
depending on the type of connection that exists between the device
and the computer.
The wrong device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name is
being used.
Check the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name by
printing a configuration page. See Use information pages
on page 142. Verify that the name, IP address, or Rendezvous host
name on the configuration page matches the device name, IP
address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected device in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The device might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on,
and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
ENWW
Solve common Macintosh problems 223
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected device in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The device software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the PPD file is in the following hard drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language
code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the
software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
The PPD file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the
language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting
started guide for instructions.
The device might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on,
and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
A print job was not sent to the device that you wanted.
Cause
Solution
The print queue might be stopped.
Restart the print queue. Open Print Monitor and select Start Jobs.
The wrong device name or IP address is being used. Another device
with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name
might have received your print job.
Check the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name by
printing a configuration page See Use information pages
on page 142. Verify that the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous
host name on the configuration page matches the device name, IP
address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause
Solution
This problem occurs with some programs.
●
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to
the device before printing.
●
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Cause
Solution
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not
installed.
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this
software is available from the Apple Web site.
224 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
When connected with a USB cable, the device does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.
Cause
Solution
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware
component.
Software troubleshooting
●
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X
version 10.2.8 or later.
●
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software
from Apple.
Hardware troubleshooting
●
Check that the device is turned on.
●
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
●
Check that you are using the appropriate Hi-Speed USB 2.0
cable.
●
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host
computer.
●
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on
the host computer.
NOTE:
ENWW
The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
Solve common Macintosh problems 225
Solve Linux problems
For information about Linux problem solving, go to the HP Linux support Web site:
hp.sourceforge.net/.
226 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
Solve PostScript problems
The following situations are specific to the PostScript (PS) language and might occur when several
printer languages are being used. Check the control-panel display for messages that might help resolve
problems.
NOTE: To receive a printed or screen message when PS errors occur, open the Print Options dialog
box and click the selection next to the PS Errors section that you want.
General problems
The job prints in Courier (the default typeface) instead of the typeface that you requested.
Cause
Solution
The requested typeface is not downloaded.
Download the font that you want and send the print job again.
Verify the font type and location. Download the font to the
device if applicable. See the software documentation for more
information.
A legal page prints with clipped margins.
Cause
Solution
The print job was too complex.
You might need to print your job at 600 dpi, reduce the
complexity of the page, or install more memory.
A PS error page prints.
ENWW
Cause
Solution
The print job might not be a PS job.
Make sure that the print job is a PS job. See whether the
software program expected a setup or PS header file to be sent
to the device.
Solve PostScript problems 227
228 Chapter 11 Problem solving
ENWW
A
Supplies and accessories
This section provides information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Use only parts and
accessories that are specifically designed for this device.
ENWW
●
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
●
Part numbers
229
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
To order parts, accessories, and supplies, contact your dealer.
230 Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Part numbers
The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and availability
of the accessories might change during the life of the device.
Accessories
Item
Description
Part number
Optional duplexer
Provides automatic printing on both
sides of the paper.
Q7549A
Optional analog fax accessory
Provides fax capabilities
Q3701A
Supplies and maintenance kits
Item
Description
Part number
HP LaserJet print cartridge
15,000-page cartridge
CD640C
Staple cassette
5,000-staple cassette
Q7839A
Print-engine maintenance kit (110 V)
Maintenance kit for 110 V devices
Q7832A
Print-engine maintenance kit (220 V)
Maintenance kit for 220 V devices
Q7833A
ADF maintenance kit
Maintenance kit for the automatic
document feeder
Q7842A
Memory
Item
Part number
48 MB
Q7714A
64 MB
Q7715A
128 MB
Q7718A
256 MB
Q7719A
512 MB
Q7720A
Cables and interfaces
Item
Description
Part number
Enhanced I/O (EIO) cards
HP Jetdirect 620n Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) print server
J7934G
HP Jetdirect print server multiprotocol EIO network cards:
HP Jetdirect 625n Fast Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-TX) print
server
J7960G
HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Fast Ethernet
(10/100/1000Base-TX) print server
J7961G
2-meter A to B cable
C6518A
USB cable
ENWW
Part numbers 231
Print media
For more information about media supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
Item
Description
Part number
HP Soft Gloss laser paper
Letter (220 x 280 mm), 50 sheets/box
C4179A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
For use with HP LaserJet devices. This
is coated paper, good for business
documents with high impact, such as
brochures, sales material, and
documents with graphics and
photographic images.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets/box
C4179B/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
and Europe
HP LaserJet tough paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 50 sheets to a carton
Q1298A/North America
For use with HP LaserJet devices. This
satin-finish paper is waterproof and tearproof, yet doesn't compromise on print
quality or performance. Use it for signs,
maps, menus, and other business
applications.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets to a carton
Q1298B/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
and Europe
HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPU1132/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 250 sheets/ream, 6ream carton
HPU1732 North America
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 5-ream carton
Q2397A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 250 sheet/ream, 5ream carton
CHP412/Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheet/ream, 5ream carton
CHP410/Europe
Specifications: 32 lb (120 g/m2).
HP's brightest LaserJet paper. Expect
spectacular color and crisp black from
this paper that is extra smooth and
brilliantly white. This is ideal for
presentations, business plans, external
correspondence and other high-value
documents
Specifications: 98 bright, 32 lb. (75 g/
m2).
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 160 g/m2, 500 sheet/ CHP413/Europe
ream, 5-ream carton
HP LaserJet paper
For use with HP LaserJet devices. This
is good for letterhead, high-value
memos, legal documents, direct mail,
and correspondence.
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPJ1124/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPJ1424/North America
Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
Specifications: 96 bright, 24 lb (90 g/m2). 5-ream carton
Q2398A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
Q2400A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream
CHP310/Europe
232 Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Item
Description
Part number
HP Printing paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPP1122/North America and Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 3ream carton
HPP113R/North America
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
CHP210/Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 300 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
CHP213/Europe
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPM1120/North America
For use with HP LaserJet and inkjet
devices. This has been created
especially for small and home offices. It
is heavier and brighter than copier paper.
Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb.
HP Multipurpose paper
For use with all office equipment-laser
and inkjet devices, copiers, and fax
machines. This has been created for
businesses that want one paper for all
their office needs. It is brighter and
smoother than other office papers.
HPM115R/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 250 sheets/ream, 12ream carton
HP25011/North America
HPM113H/North America
HPM1420/North America
Specifications: 90 bright, 20 lb (75 g/m2). Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
Legal (8.5 x 14 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HP Office paper
For use with all office equipment-laser
and inkjet devices, copiers, and fax
machines. This is good for high-volume
printing.
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPC8511/North America and Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPC3HP/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb (75 g/m2). ream carton
HPC8514/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), Quick Pack; 2,500sheet carton
HP2500S/North America and Mexico
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), Quick Pack 3-hole;
2,500-sheet carton
HP2500P/North America
Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/ream, Q2408A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
5-ream carton
ENWW
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
Q2407A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton
CHP110/Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), Quick Pack;
2500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
CHP113/Europe
Part numbers 233
Item
Description
Part number
HP Office recycled paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPE1120/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPE113H/North America
Legal (8.5 x 14 in), 500 sheets/ream, 10ream carton
HPE1420/North America
Letter (8.5 x 11 in), 50 sheets to a carton
92296T/North America, Asia-Pacific
countries/regions, and Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets to a carton
922296U/Asia-Pacific countries/regions
and Europe
For use with all office equipment-laser
and inkjet devices, copiers, and fax
machines. This is good for high-volume
printing.
Satisfies U.S. Executive Order 13101 for
environmentally preferable products.
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb, 30%
post-consumer content.
HP LaserJet transparencies
For use only with HP LaserJet
monochrome devices. For crisp, sharp
text and graphics, rely on the only
transparencies specifically designed and
tested to work with monochrome
HP LaserJet devices.
Specifications: 4.3-mil thickness.
234 Appendix A Supplies and accessories
ENWW
B
ENWW
Specifications
●
Physical specifications
●
Electrical specifications
●
Acoustic emissions
●
Operating environment
235
Physical specifications
Table B-1 Dimensions
1
Model
Height
Depth
Width
Weight1
HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP
1,194 mm (47 in)
762 mm (30 in)
737 mm (29 in)
30.2 kg (66.5 lb)
Without print cartridge
Table B-2 Dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened
Model
Height
Depth
Width
HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP
1,499 mm (59 in)
1,067 mm (42 in)
1,016 mm (40 in)
236 Appendix B Specifications
ENWW
Electrical specifications
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This can damage the device and void the product warranty.
Table B-3 Power requirements
Specification
110-volt models
220-volt models
Power requirements
100 to 127 Vac
220 to 240 Vac
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
8.0 Amps
4.5 Amps
Rated current
Table B-4 Power consumption (average, in watts)1
ENWW
Model
Printing2
Copying
Ready or
standby3,4
Sleep5
Off
HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP
< 615 W7
615 W
75 W
21 W
0.01 W
1
Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/ljm5039mfp for current information.
2
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
3
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep = 30 minutes.
4
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 37.5 BTU/hour.
5
Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = less than 8.5 seconds.
6
Print speed is 25 ppm.
7
Print speed is 35 ppm.
Electrical specifications 237
Acoustic emissions
Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level1,3
Sound power level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing3
LWAd= 6.6 Bels (A) [66 dB(A)]
Ready
Essentially Inaudible
Sound pressure level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing3
LpAm=54 dB (A)
Ready
Essentially Inaudible
1
Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/ljm5039mfp for current information.
2
Configuration tested: HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP, simplex printing, A4-size paper.
3
Print speed is 35 ppm.
Operating environment
Table B-6 Necessary conditions
Environmental condition
Printing
Storage/standby
Temperature (printer and print cartridge)
15° to 32.5°C (59° to 89°F)
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Relative humidity
10% to 80%
10% to 90%
238 Appendix B Specifications
ENWW
C
Regulatory information
This section contains the following regulatory information:
ENWW
●
FCC regulations
●
Environmental product stewardship program
●
Telecom statement
●
Declaration of conformity
●
Safety statements
239
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
240 Appendix C Regulatory information
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep modes, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies for ENERGY
STAR® (Version 3.0), which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy-efficient
office products.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR mark are U.S. registered marks. As an ENERGY STAR
partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines
for energy efficiency. For more information, see www.energystar.gov.
Toner consumption
Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing, see Print on both sides of
the paper on page 104 (Windows) or Print on both sides of the paper on page 109 (Mac)) and N-up
printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting
demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 241
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are
environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, operation and recycling
processes. We ensure your returned HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing
them to recover valuable plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste
from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to
you. Your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled responsibly when you participate in the
HP Planet Partners program. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (for example, print cartridges) can be returned
to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-to-use and free take
back program is available in more than 35 countries/regions. Multilingual program information and
instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
HP print supplies returns and recycling program information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge. In 2004, HP Planet
Partners for LaserJet Supplies was available in 85% of the world market where HP LaserJet supplies
are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most
HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site:
www.hp.com/recycle.
Use the label to return empty, original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for
non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty returns. Printing supplies or other
objects inadvertently sent to the HP Planet Partners program cannot be returned.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2004 through the HP Planet
Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge
materials diverted from landfills. Worldwide, in 2004, HP recycled an average of 59% of the print
cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and metals are used to make new
products such as HP products, plastic trays, and spools. The remaining materials are disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner.
●
U.S. returns. For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP
encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the
single, pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in
the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/recycle.
●
Non-U.S. returns. Non-U.S. customers should visit the www.hp.com/recycle Web site for further
information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper
according to EN12281:2002.
242 Appendix C Regulatory information
ENWW
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the scanner and/or control panel liquid
crystal display that may require special handling at end-of-life.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
HP LaserJet M5039XS Series MFP device
Type
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery BR1632
Weight
1.5 g
Location
On formatter board
User-removable
No
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where
you purchased the product.
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 243
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)
can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/
community/environment/productinfo/safety.
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP’s commitment to the environment
●
HP’s environmental management system
●
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment.
244 Appendix C Regulatory information
ENWW
Telecom statement
The HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP models have the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 already
installed to provide communication to the public switch telephone network (PSTN) for fax functionality.
See the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for all regulatory approval information and
regulatory notices associated with the fax functionality and that device.
ENWW
Telecom statement 245
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company DoC#: BOISB-0502-01-rel.8.0
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
HP LaserJet M5039 MFP Series
Accessories4):
Q7549A – Optional Duplexer
Q7834A – Optional 1x500 Sheet Cabinet
Q7835A – Optional 3x500 Sheet Cabinet
Q7604A – Optional Stapler/Stacker
BOISB-0308-00 – Fax Module
Regulatory Model Number2):
Product Options:
Print Cartridge
BOISB-0502-01
All
CD640C
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC:
CISPR22:2005 / EN55022:2006 - Class A1) 3)
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 +A2
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
TELECOM:
TBR-21:1998; EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Annex II, EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and carries the CE-Marking
accordingly.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2. For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name
or the product number(s).
3. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A
product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures”.
4. All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett-Packard under the regulatory model number BOISB-0308-00
incorporate the Multi-Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module.
5. Telecom standards apply to Q7830A and Q7831A. Fax solution is factory installed on these models.
Boise, Idaho , USA
September, 2009
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, , D-71034, Böblingen, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, , (Phone:
208-396-6000)
246 Appendix C Regulatory information
ENWW
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.
« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord statement (Japan)
EMC statement (Korea)
EMI statement (Taiwan)
ENWW
Safety statements 247
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet M5039XS, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen
turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet M5039XS - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei
katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.
248 Appendix C Regulatory information
ENWW
D
Working with memory and print server
cards
This section explains the memory features of the printer and provides steps for expansion.
ENWW
●
Overview
●
Installing printer memory
●
Check DIMM installation
●
Save resources (permanent resources)
●
Enable memory for Windows
●
Using HP Jetdirect print server cards
249
Overview
One dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot is available for upgrading the device memory. DIMMs are
available in 32, 48, 64, 128, and 512 MB.
For ordering information, contact your dealer.
NOTE: Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) used in previous HP LaserJet printers are not
compatible with the printer.
The printer also has one EIO slot for expanding the printer networking capabilities. The EIO slot can be
used to upgrade the printer with an additional network connection, such as a wireless print server,
network card, or a connectivity card for a serial or AppleTalk connection.
NOTE: The HP LaserJet M5039XS MFP comes with a network device already installed. The EIO slot
may be used to provide networking capabilities in addition to those already built into the printer.
To find out how much memory is installed in the printer, or to find out what is installed in the EIO slot,
print a configuration page. See Use information pages on page 142.
250 Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
Installing printer memory
You might want to add more printer memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics, print
PostScript (PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Added memory also gives you more
flexibility in supporting job-storage features, such as quick copying.
To install printer memory
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic
wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package, then touch bare metal on the
printer.
The HP LaserJet M5039XS Series MFP comes with one DIMM slot. If desired, you can replace a DIMM
installed in the slot with a higher memory DIMM.
If you have not already done so, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed in
the printer before adding more memory. See Use information pages on page 142.
ENWW
1.
Turn off the device, and disconnect all of the cables.
2.
At the back of the device, remove the formatter cover.
Installing printer memory 251
3.
Open the formatter door.
4.
Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package.
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity, always wear an
electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap or touch the surface of the antistatic package before
handling DIMMs.
5.
Hold the DIMM by the edges, and align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that
the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open.)
252 Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
6.
Press the DIMM straight into the slot, and press firmly. Make sure the locks on each side of the
DIMM snap into place.
NOTE: To remove a DIMM, first release the locks.
ENWW
7.
Close the formatter door.
8.
Replace the formatter cover.
Installing printer memory 253
9.
Reconnect the cables, and then turn on the device.
Check DIMM installation
After installing the DIMM, make sure that the installation was successful.
Verify that DIMM is installed correctly
1.
Turn the device on. Check that the Ready light is illuminated after the device has gone through the
startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed. See
Control-panel messages on page 172.
2.
Print a configuration page (see Use information pages on page 142).
3.
Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration page that
was printed before the memory installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the DIMM
might not be installed correctly, or the DIMM might be defective. Repeat the installation procedure.
If necessary, install a different DIMM.
NOTE: If you installed a device language (personality), check the "Installed Personalities and Options"
section on the configuration page. This area should list the new device language.
254 Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
Save resources (permanent resources)
Utilities or jobs that you download to the device sometimes include resources (for example, fonts,
macros, or patterns). Resources that are internally marked as permanent remain in the device memory
until you turn the device power off.
Use the following guidelines if you use the page description language (PDL) ability to mark resources
as permanent. For technical details, see an appropriate PDL reference for PCL or PS.
●
Mark resources as permanent only when it is absolutely necessary that they remain in memory
while the device power is turned on.
●
Send permanent resources to the device only at the beginning of a print job and not while the device
is printing.
NOTE: Overusing permanent resources or downloading them while the device is printing might affect
device performance or the ability to print complex pages.
Enable memory for Windows
ENWW
1.
On the Start menu, Settings, and Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2.
Select this device and select Properties.
3.
On the Configure tab, click More.
4.
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Go to Check DIMM installation on page 254.
Save resources (permanent resources) 255
Using HP Jetdirect print server cards
Follow these procedures to install or remove an EIO card.
Install an HP Jetdirect print server card
1.
Turn off the device.
2.
Remove the two screws and cover plate from the EIO slot on the back of the device.
NOTE: Do not discard the screws or the cover plate. Save them for future use if you remove the
EIO card.
3.
Install the EIO card in the EIO slot and tighten the screws.
256 Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
4.
Connect the network cable to the EIO card.
5.
Turn on the device, and then print a configuration page to verify that the new EIO device is
recognized. See Use information pages on page 142.
NOTE: When you print a configuration page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network
configuration and status information also prints.
Remove an HP Jetdirect print server card
ENWW
1.
Turn off the device.
2.
Disconnect the network cable from the EIO card.
3.
Loosen the two screws from the EIO card, and then remove the EIO card from the EIO slot.
4.
Place the cover plate from the EIO slot onto the back of the device. Insert and tighten the two
screws.
5.
Turn on the device.
Using HP Jetdirect print server cards 257
258 Appendix D Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
Glossary
bidirectional communication
Two-way data transmission.
bin
A receptacle for holding printed pages.
BOOTP
Abbreviation for “Bootstrap Protocol,” an Internet protocol that a computer uses to find its IP address.
calibration
The process in which the printer makes internal adjustments to produce the best print quality.
chooser
A Macintosh accessory that you use to select a device.
control panel
The area on the printer that contains buttons and a display screen. Use the control panel to set printer settings
and to get information about the printer status.
default
The normal or standard setting for hardware or software.
DHCP
Abbreviation for “dynamic host configuration protocol.” Individual computers or peripherals that are connected to
a network use DHCP to find their own configuration information, including the IP address.
DIMM
Abbreviation for “dual inline memory module.” A small circuit board that holds memory chips.
duplex
A feature that accommodates printing on both sides of a sheet of paper. Also called “two-sided printing.”
EIO
Abbreviation for “enhanced input/output.” A hardware interface that is used to add a print server, network adaptor,
hard disk, or other plug-in item for HP printers.
Emulated PostScript
Software that emulates Adobe PostScript, a programming language that describes the appearance of the printed
page. This printer language appears as “PS” in many menus.
firmware
Programming instructions that are stored in a read-only memory unit inside the printer.
font
A complete set of letters, numerals, and symbols in a typeface.
ENWW
Glossary 259
fuser
The assembly that uses heat to fuse the toner onto the print media.
grayscale
Various shades of gray.
halftone pattern
A halftone pattern uses differing sizes of ink dots to produce a continuous-tone image such as a photograph.
HP Jetdirect
An HP product for network printing.
HP Web Jetadmin
An HP-trademarked Web-based printer control software that you can use on a computer to manage any peripheral
that is connected to an HP Jetdirect print server.
I/O
Abbreviation for “input/output,” refers to computer-port settings.
IP address
The unique number assigned to a computer device that is connected to a network.
IPX/SPX
Abbreviation for “internetwork packet exchange/sequenced packet exchange.”
media
The paper, labels, transparencies, or other material on which the printer prints the image.
memory tag
A memory partition that has a specific address.
monochrome
Black and white. Devoid of color.
network
A system of computers interconnected by telephone wires or other means in order to share information.
network administrator
A person who manages a network.
page buffer
Temporary printer memory used to hold page data while the printer creates an image of the page.
PCL
Abbreviation for “Printer Control Language.”
peripheral
An auxiliary device, such as a printer, modem, or storage system, that works in conjunction with a computer.
personality
Distinctive features or characteristics of a printer or printer language.
pixel
Abbreviation for “picture element,” the smallest unit of area in an image displayed on a screen.
PJL
Abbreviation for “printer job language.”
PostScript
260 Glossary
ENWW
A trademarked page-description language.
PPD
Abbreviation for “PostScript printer description.”
printer driver
A software program that a computer uses to gain access to printer features.
RAM
Abbreviation for “random access memory,” a type of computer memory that stores data that can change.
raster image
An image composed of dots.
render
The process of producing text or graphics.
ROM
Abbreviation for “read-only memory,” a type of computer memory that stores data that should not change.
supplies
Materials that the printer uses and that must be replaced. The supply item for this printer is the print cartridge.
TCP/IP
An internet protocol that has become the global standard for communications.
toner
The fine black or colored powder that forms the image on the printed media.
transfer unit
The black plastic belt that transports media inside the printer and transfers toner from the print cartridge onto the
media.
tray
The receptacle that holds blank media.
ENWW
Glossary 261
262 Glossary
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
500-sheet trays
insert or close error
message 176
unexpected size or type error
message 173
500–sheet tray. See tray 3
A
A4 paper settings 44
access denied message 175
accessibility features 4
accessories
included 3
ordering 230
part numbers 231
acoustic specifications 238
activity log, fax 143
address book, e-mail
deleting addresses 130
address books, e-mail
adding addresses 130
clearing 52
recipient lists 129
address books, e-mail
auto-complete function 128
LDAP server errors 177
LDAP support 124
recipient lists, creating 129
address, device
Macintosh, problemsolving 223
ADF
cleaning 157
error messages 176
jams 176
loading 79
locating 5
maintenance kit 155
ENWW
media supported 69
sizes supported 127
adhesive labels
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
Administration menu, control
panel 19
alerts, e-mail 144, 149
alignment settings, trays 46
anticounterfeit supplies 151
AppleTalk setting 58
AppleTalk settings 33
Attention light
locating 16
autoconfiguration, drivers 9
automatic document feeder. See
ADF
automatic document feeder (ADF)
jams 176
automatic two-sided printing path
copying documents 117
B
batteries included 243
billing codes report, fax 143
bin, output
jams, clearing 172
bins
default settings 26
full, error messages 177
included 2
locating 5
bins, output
paper curl, problemsolving 168
blank copies, problemsolving 220
blank pages
printing 102
problem-solving 169
bleeds, printing 82
blocked fax list, printing 143
blurred print, problemsolving 203
Bonjour Settings 149
books
copying 120
both sides, copying
default settings 21
both sides, printing on
blank pages default
settings 43
default settings 26
error messages 175
loading paper 109
Macintosh settings 149
problem-solving 169
buffer overflow errors 173
buttons, control panel
locating 16
sounds, settings 42
touchscreen 17
C
calibrating scanner 48, 159
call report, fax 143
Canadian DOC regulations 247
canceling
copy jobs 122
printing 110
card stock
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
cartridges
accessing 5
authentication 151
genuine HP 150
jams, clearing 172
management menu 29
non-HP 142
Index 263
part numbers 231
recycling 242
replacement intervals 150
replacing 151
storage 150
cartridges, print
error messages 176
characters, misformed 202
chosen personality not
available 176
cleaning
ADF 157
auto, settings 47
exterior 156
lid backing 157
paper path 158
scanner glass 156
clock
error message 172
collating copies 116
colored paper, printing on 64
configuration page
Information menu 20
Macintosh 149
printing 142
configuration, driver 10
control panel
access denied 175
Administration menu 19
buttons 16
cleaning page, printing 158
copy-screen 112
Default Job Options menu 21
default settings 42
Device Behavior menu 42
E-mail Setup menu 41
e-mail screen 126
Fax Setup menu 38
help 18
Home screen 17
Information menu 20
Initial Setup menu 30
key press sounds, default
settings 42
lights 16
locating 5
Management menu 29
messages, alphabetical
list 172
264 Index
messages, numerical list 163,
172
messages, types of 171
Print Quality menu 46
Resets menu 52
Send Setup menu 41
Service menu 52
settings 10
stapler settings 91
test 51
Time/Scheduling menu 27
touchscreen buttons 17
Troubleshooting menu 48
copying
books 120
canceling 122
collating 116
control-panel navigation 112
default settings 21, 22
error messages 178
features 3, 111
interrupting jobs 44
Job Mode 121
loading ADF 79
media, problem-solving 218
multiple originals 121
photos 120
problem-solving 220
problems, preventing 217
quality, problem-solving 217
size, problem-solving 220
stapling 91
two-sided documents 117
using scanner glass 77
counterfeit supplies 151
Courier font settings 44
Courier font, problem-solving 227
cover pages 102, 108
creased paper, problemsolving 203
crooked pages 202
curled paper, problemsolving 203, 218
curly paper, problem-solving 168
custom-size paper
default settings 26
driver settings 102
printing on 83
customer support
Linux 226
D
dark copying 218
Data light
locating 16
date, setting 27
Default Job Options menu 21
default settings
copy 22
Device Behavior menu 42
e-mail 24
fax 23
originals 21
print 26
Resets menu 52
Send to Folder 25
density
problem-solving 202
settings 47, 149
Device Behavior menu 42
diagnostics
component 50
control panel 51
networks 34
paper path 48
print-stop test 51
sensors 50
digital faxing 139
digital sending
about 123, 127
address books 129, 130
configuring e-mail 124
control-panel settings 126
default settings 25
error messages 176, 177,
178
folders 132
gateways, finding 125
job settings 128
LDAP support 124
loading documents 127
recipient lists 129
sending documents 128
Setup menu 41
SMTP support 124
validating gateway
addresses 221
workflow 132
DIMMs
error messages 174
installing 251
ENWW
part numbers 231
types available 250
verifying installation 254
disk
EIO slots 250
installing 256
removing 257
disposal, end-of-life 243
DLC/LLC settings 33
document feeder
copying two-sided
documents 117
document feeder kit,
replacing 155
dots, problem-solving 202, 203,
218
double-sided copying
default settings 21
double-sided printing
blank pages, default
settings 43
default settings 26
error messages 175
loading paper 109
Macintosh settings 149
problem-solving 169
downloading software 8
dpi, settings 46, 149
drivers
configuration 10
included 3
Macintosh features 107
Macintosh settings 107
Macintosh, problemsolving 223
operating systems
supported 8
presets (Macintosh) 107
quick sets (Windows) 100
selecting 9
Services tab 106
settings 10
universal 9
Update Now 10
Windows features 100
Windows settings 100
dropouts, problem-solving 202
duplex printing accessory
error messages 175
ENWW
duplexer
jams, clearing 172
locating 5
Macintosh settings 109, 149
media supported 68
models including 2
paper path test 50
part number 231
problem-solving 169
Windows settings 104
duplexing
blank pages, default
settings 43
copying documents 117
default settings 26
E
e-mail
default settings 24
e-mail alerts 144, 149
E-mail Setup menu 41
Economode 47
EIO accessory
settings 30
EIO cards
buffer overflow 173
errors 175
installing 256
part numbers 231
removing 257
slots 250
electrical specifications 237
embedded Web server 12, 13
end-of-life disposal 243
energy specifications 237
Energy Star compliance 4
enlarging documents 101
envelopes
loading 76
specifications 62, 67
storing 70
wrinkled, problem-solving 210
environment for device
problem-solving 201
environment for printer
specifications 238
environmental stewardship
program 241
EPS files, problem-solving 224
Error button, control panel
touchscreen 18
error messages
alphabetical list 172
default settings 42
e-mail alerts 144, 149
event log 48
numerical list 163, 172
types of 171
Ethernet cards, part
numbers 231
European Union, waste
disposal 243
event log 48
e-mail
about 123, 127
address books 129, 130
auto-complete function 128
configuring 124
control-panel settings 126
error messages 176, 177,
178
gateways, finding 125
job settings 128
LDAP errors 177
LDAP support 124
loading documents 127
recipient lists 129
sending documents 128
SMTP support 124
validating gateway
addresses 221
F
FastRes 3
fax accessory
connecting phone line 138
connection, locating 7
default settings 23
installing 134
models including 3
printing schedule 28
settings 48
user guide 133
Fax Activity Log
clearing 52
fax reports, printing 20, 48, 143
Fax Setup menu 38
faxing, digital 139
FCC regulations 240
Index 265
features 2, 3
feeding problems, media 218
file directory, printing 143
File Upload, Macintosh 149
Finnish laser safety
statement 248
Firmware Update, Macintosh 149
first page
blank 102
use different paper 102, 108
folders
default settings 25
error messages 176
sending to 132
fonts
Courier settings 44
EPS files, problemsolving 224
included 3
list, printing 20, 143
permanent resources 255
problem-solving 227
Upload Macintosh 149
foreign interface harness (FIH) 7
fraud hotline 151
FTP, sending to 132
full-bleed images 82
fuser
error messages 174
modes 46
paper wrapping errors 172
replacing 155
fuser modes 65
G
gateways
configuring 124
error messages 176
finding 125
testing 125
validating addresses 221
General Protection FaultException
OE 222
glass
cleaning 156
sizes supported 127
glossary xi
glossy paper
loading 76
266 Index
graphical display, control
panel 16
gray background, problemsolving 202
H
heartbeat LED
locating 7
heavy paper
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
held jobs 94
help 3
Help button, control panel
touchscreen 18
help, control panel 18
Home button, control panel
touchscreen 18
Home screen, control panel 17
HP Driver Configuration 10
HP fraud hotline 151
HP Jetdirect print server
configuring 58
error messages 175
installing 256
models including 2
part numbers 231
removing 257
settings 30
HP LaserJet Tough paper 64
HP media, ordering 232
HP Printer Utility 148, 149
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 12
HP Universal Print Driver 9
HP Web Jetadmin 13, 147
humidity
problem-solving 201
specifications 238
I
I/O configuration
network configuration 55
settings 30
Illegal Operation errors 222
image defects, problemsolving 201
image quality
copy, improving 217
copy, problem-solving 217
settings 46
image reptition, problemsolving 203
inactivity timeout 42
Information menu 20
information pages 13
Information tab, embedded Web
server 146
Initial Setup menu 30
input trays. See trays
insert tray error messages 176
install cartridge error
message 176
installers, Windows 14
installing
EIO cards 256
fax accessory 134
memory (DIMMs) 251
insufficient memory 173, 176
internal clock errors 172
Internet fax 139
IP address
Macintosh, problemsolving 223
IPX/SPX setting 33, 57
J
jams
access door, locating 5
ADF, clearing 176
common causes of 180
duplexer, clearing 172
e-mail alerts 144
frequent 197
locations 181
output-bin, clearing 172
print quality after 201
print-cartridge area,
clearing 172
recovery 182
recovery settings 42
trays, clearing 193
Japanese VCCI statement 247
Jetadmin, HP Web 13, 147
Jetdirect print server
configuring 58
error messages 175
installing 256
models including 2
part numbers 231
ENWW
removing 257
settings 30
Job Mode, copying 121
job storage
accessing 93
features 93
private 95
proof and hold 94
QuickCopy 96
settings 29
stored 97
jobs
Macintosh settings 149
K
keys, control panel
locating 16
sounds, settings 42
touchscreen 17
Korean EMC statement 247
L
labels
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
LAN fax 139
language
default, setting 42
language, printer
default settings 44
laser safety statements 247, 248
LDAP servers
connecting to 124
error messages 177
validating gateway
addresses 221
LEDs
locating 7
legal paper
clipped margins 227
letterhead
loading 76
lid, cleaning 157
light copying 218
light print
problem-solving 202
lights
control panel 16
lines, problem-solving
copies 217
ENWW
link speed settings 37
Linux drivers 8, 226
loading
ADF 79
custom-size media 83
custom-sized media 83
documents, sizes
supported 127
error messages 177
originals on scanner glass 77
rotated media 81
scanner glass 127
sizes supported 127
special media 76
staples 89
tray 1 71
tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 74
unexpected size or type error
message 173
Lock Resources, Macintosh 149
loose toner, problem-solving 202
M
Macintosh
AppleTalk settings 33
driver features 107
driver settings 11, 107
drivers supported 8, 9
drivers, problem-solving 223
HP Printer Utility 12, 148
problems, solving 223
removing software 12
software 12
software components 14
supported operating
systems 8
USB card, problemsolving 224
mailing labels
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
maintenance kit
using 155
maintenance kits
part numbers 231
Management menu 29
margins
custom-sized media 83
full-bleed images, printing 82
legal paper, problemsolving 227
registration, setting 46
material restrictions 243
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 244
media
A4 settings 44
colored paper 64
curled 168, 203, 218
custom-size 83, 102
default size 44
default size, selecting 26
document size, selecting 101
envelopes 62
first page 102, 108
fuser modes 46, 65
guidelines 60
HP LaserJet Tough paper 64
HP, ordering 232
labels 63
legal, clipped margins 227
letterhead 64
loading tray 1 71
loading tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 74
pages per sheet 103, 108
preprinted 64
problem-solving 201, 218
problem-solving trays 168
recycled paper 64
rotated, printing on 81
size-sensing, automatic 66
sizes supported 67
skewed 202
special, loading 76
specifications 61, 66
stapler support 88
storing 70
vellum 64
wrinkled 203
media jams. See jams
memory
autoconfiguration 9
DIMM error messages 174
included 2, 12
installing DIMMs 251
insufficient 173, 176
part numbers 231
permanent resources 255
Index 267
permanent storage error
messages 175
supply errors 172
upgrading 250
verifying installation 254
Menu button 16
menu map
Information menu 20
printing 142
menus, control panel
access denied 175
Administration 19
Default Job Options 21
Device Behavior 42
E-mail Setup 41
Fax Setup 38
Information 20
Initial Setup 30
Management 29
Print Quality 46
Resets 52
Send Setup 41
Service 52
Time/Scheduling 27
Troubleshooting 48
mercury-free product 243
messages
alphabetical list 172
default settings 42
e-mail alerts 144, 149
event log 48
numerical list 163, 172
types of 171
misformed characters, problemsolving 202
multifeeds 219
multiple pages per sheet 103,
108
multipurpose tray. See tray 1
N
n-up printing 103, 108
Network Folder, scan to 132
Networking tab, embedded Web
server 146
networks
AppleTalk settings 33
configuring 55
configuring gateway
addresses 124
268 Index
connection, locating 7
default gateway 56
diagnostics 34
disabling DLC/LLC 58
disabling protocols 57
DLC/LLC settings 33
finding SMTP gateways 125
HP Jetdirect print server error
messages 175
HP Jetdirect print servers,
models including 2
HP Web Jetadmin 147
IP address 55
IPX/SPX settings 33
link speed settings 37
Macintosh settings 149
protocol configuration page,
printing 37
security 34
SMTP servers 124
subnet mask 56
TCP/IP parameters 55
TCP/IP settings 30
testing SMTP settings 125
validating gateway
addresses 221
noise specifications 238
non-HP supplies 142
not responding, problemsolving 170
Novell login required 177
number of copies
default settings 22
NVRAM errors 175
O
on/off switch, locating 5
online help, control panel 18
operating environment
specifications 238
operating systems supported 8
Optimize print quality 46
ordering
media, HP 232
part numbers for 231
supplies and accessories 230
orientation, page
Image Rotation 43
rotated media 81
output bins
full, error messages 177
output quality
copy, improving 217
copy, problem-solving 217
settings 46
overhead transparencies
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
P
page orientation
Image Rotation 43
rotated media 81
pages per sheet 103, 108
paper
A4 settings 44
colored 64
curled 168, 203, 218
custom-size 83, 102
default size 44
default size, selecting 26
document size, selecting 101
first page 102, 108
fuser modes 46, 65
guidelines 60
HP LaserJet Tough 64
HP, ordering 232
legal, clipped margins 227
letterhead 64
loading ADF 79
loading tray 1 71
loading tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 74
pages per sheet 103, 108
problem-solving 201, 218
problem-solving trays 168
recycled 64
rotated, printing on 81
size-sensing, automatic 66
sizes supported 67
skewed 202
special media, loading 76
specifications 61, 66
stapler support 88
storing 70
vellum 64
wrinkled 203
paper input trays. See trays
paper jams. See jams
ENWW
paper path
cleaning 158
tests 48
part numbers
accessories 231
cables 231
EIO cards 231
maintenance kits 231
media, HP 232
memory 231
print cartridges 231
staples 231
pausing a print request 110
PCL drivers
default settings 44
operating systems
supported 8
selecting 9
universal 9
PDF error pages 44
perform printer maintenance
message 155
permanent resources 255
permanent storage errors 175
personality
default settings 44
phone line, connecting fax
accessory 138
photos
copying 120
loading 127
physical specifications 236
PINs, private jobs 95
ports
included 2
locating 7
problem-solving
Macintosh 224
supported 4
PostScript
problem-solving 227
PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files
included 12
power specifications 237
power switch, locating 5
PPDs
included 12
preprinted paper
loading 76
ENWW
presets (Macintosh) 107
preventive maintenance kit
using 155
print cartridges
accessing 5
authentication 151
error messages 176
genuine HP 150
jams, clearing 172
management menu 29
non-HP 142
part numbers 231
recycling 242
replacement intervals 150
replacing 151
storage 150
Print Document On 101
print jobs
default settings 26
print quality
blurred 203
dropouts 202
environment 201
gray background 202
image defects 201
jams, after 201
light print 202
lines 202
loose toner 202
media 201
misformed characters 202
repeating defects 202
repetitive images 203
scattered lines 203
smeared toner 202
specks 202
tire tracks 203
troubleshooting 156
white lines 203
white spots 203
Print Quality menu, control
panel 46
print-stop test 51
printer drivers. See drivers
printer maintenance kit
using 155
printing system software 8
priority, settings 10
private jobs 95
problem-solving
blank pages 169
blurred print 203
copy quality 217
copy size 220
copying 217, 220
curled paper 168, 203
dropouts 202
duplexing 169
e-mail alerts 144, 149
environment 201
EPS files 224
Error button, control panel
touchscreen 18
event log 48
fonts 227
gateway addresses 221
gray background 202
image defects 201
legal paper 227
light print 202
lines 202, 203
lines, copies 217
Linux 226
Macintosh issues 223
media 201, 218
messages, types of 171
networks 34
PostScript problems 227
printing 170
repeating defects 202
repetitive images 203
scattered lines 203
skewed pages 202
slow printing 168
smeared toner 202
specks 202
text 169
text quality 202, 203
tire tracks 203
trays 168
Troubleshooting menu 48
white spots 203
Windows issues 222
wrinkled paper 203
processor speed 3
proof and hold jobs 94
ProRes 3
protocol configuration page,
printing 37
Index 269
PS emulation driver
default settings 44
selecting 9
PS error pages
default settings 44
Q
quality
copy, improving 217
copy, problem-solving 217
settings 46
quick sets 100
R
Ready light
locating 16
recipient lists 129
recovery, jam 182
recycled paper 64
recycling 242
reducing documents 101
registration, tray alignment 46
removing Macintosh software 12
repeating defects, problemsolving 202, 203
replacing
maintenance kits 155
replacing printing cartridges 151
reset button 16
Resets menu, control panel 52
resizing documents 101
resolution
features 3
settings 46, 149
troubleshooting quality 156
Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt) 47, 149
resource saving 255
REt (Resolution Enhancement
technology 47
REt (Resolution Enhancement
technology) 149
retention, job
accessing 93
features 93
private 95
proof and hold 94
QuickCopy 96
stored 97
270 Index
rollers
maintenance kit, included
rotated pages
default settings 43
155
S
safety statements 247, 248
saving resources, memory 255
scaling documents 101
scanner calibration 48, 159
scanner glass
cleaning 156
copying from 77
scanner lid backing, cleaning 157
scanning
default settings 21
loading ADF 79
no-wait 44
scanning e-mail
validating gateway
addresses 221
scanning to e-mail
default settings 24
scanning to e-mail
about 123, 127
address books 129, 130
configuring 124
control-panel settings 126
error messages 176, 177,
178
gateways, finding 125
job settings 128
LDAP support 124
loading documents 127
recipient lists 129
sending documents 128
SMTP support 124
scanning to folder 132
scanning to workflow 132
security
settings 34
Send Setup menu 41
Send to Folder 132
Send to Workflow 132
sending to e-mail
default settings 24
sending to e-mail
about 123, 124, 127
address books 129, 130
error messages 176, 177,
178
gateways, finding 125
job settings 128
LDAP support 124
loading documents 127
recipient lists 129
sending documents 128
settings 126
SMTP support 124
validating gateway
addresses 221
sensors, testing 50
serial buffer overflow 173
Service menu, control panel 52
Services tab 106
settings
Default Job Options menu 21
driver presets
(Macintosh) 107
drivers 10
priority 10
quick sets (Windows) 100
Settings tab, embedded Web
server 146
SIMMs, incompatibility 250
size, copy
problem-solving 220
size, media
A4 settings 44
automatic sensing 66
custom, printing on 83
default settings 44
default, selecting 26
unexpected, error
message 173
sizes, media
selecting trays 86
skewed pages 202
Sleep button 16
Sleep mode
power specifications 237
settings 27, 29
slow printing, problemsolving 168
smeared toner, problemsolving 202
SMTP gateways
error messages 178
ENWW
SMTP servers
configuring gateway
address 124
connecting to 124
finding gateways 125
gateways, finding 125
testing 125
validating gateway
addresses 221
software
embedded Web server 12
HP Printer Utility 148
HP Web Jetadmin 13
Macintosh 12, 14
settings 10
supported operating
systems 8
uninstalling Macintosh 12
Web sites 8
Windows 14
specifications
acoustic 238
electrical 237
envelopes 62
features 3
media 66
operating environment 238
paper 61
physical 236
trays, media supported 67
specks, problem-solving 202,
203
speed
problem-solving 168
troubleshooting 162
speed dial list, printing 143
Spool32 errors 222
spots, problem-solving 202, 203
staple cartridges
empty, stop or continue
settings 92
loading 89
stapler
default settings 22, 43
empty, stop or continue
settings 92
loading staples 89
locating 5
media supported 68
models including 2
ENWW
paper sizes supported 88
using 91
staples
part numbers 231
stapling jobs 91
Start button 16
Start button, control panel
touchscreen 18
status
e-mail alerts 144
embedded Web server 145
Home screen, control
panel 17
HP Printer Utility,
Macintosh 149
messages, types of 171
Status button 16
Stop button 16
Stop button, control panel
touchscreen 18
stopping a print request 110
storage, job
accessing 93
features 93
Macintosh settings 149
private 95
proof and hold 94
QuickCopy 96
settings 29
stored 97
stored jobs 97
storing
envelopes 70
paper 70
print cartridges 150
streaks, problem-solving 218
subnet mask 56
supplies
authentication 151
counterfeit 151
e-mail alerts 144
management menu 29
memory errors 172
non-HP 142
ordering 230
recycling 242
replacement intervals 150
replacing print cartridges 151
Resets menu 52
status page, printing 142
status, viewing with embedded
Web server 145
status, viewing with HP Printer
Utility 149
support
Linux 226
T
Taiwan EMI statement 247
TCP/IP settings 30
technical support
Linux 226
temperature specifications 238
tests
component 50
control panel 51
networks 34
paper path 48
print-stop 51
sensors 50
text, problem-solving
blurred 203
blurry 218
dropouts 202
garbled 169
misformed characters 202
time, setting 27
Time/Scheduling menu, control
panel 27
timeout settings 30, 42
tire tracks, problem-solving 203
toner
adhesion problems,
solving 218
density setting 149
Economode 47
loose, problem-solving 202
smeared, problemsolving 202
tough paper 64
transparencies
HP, ordering 234
loading 76
specifications 63, 67
tray 1
custom-size media, printing
on 83
insert or close error
message 176
jams, clearing 193
Index 271
load error message 177
loading paper 71
loading special media 76
locating 5
media supported 67
printing from 73
problem-solving 168
rotated media, printing on 81
unexpected size or type error
message 173
tray 2
custom-size media, printing
on 83
jams, clearing 193
loading 74
locating 5
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 67
problem-solving 168
rotated media, printing on 81
tray 3
custom-sized media, printing
on 83
jams, clearing 193
loading 74
locating 5
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 68
problem-solving 168
tray 4
custom-sized media, printing
on 83
loading 74
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 68
tray 5
custom-sized media, printing
on 83
loading 74
locating 5
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 68
tray 6
custom-sized media, printing
on 83
loading 74
272 Index
locating 5
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 68
trays
default settings 43
double-sided printing 105,
109
feeding problems, solving 219
included 2
insert or close error
message 176
jams, clearing 193
loading paper 71
locating 5
Macintosh settings 149
media size-sensing,
automatic 66
media supported 67
paper path tests 49
problem-solving 168
registration, setting 46
unexpected size or type error
message 173
troubleshooting
checklist 162
control panel messages,
numerical 163
error messages, alphabetical
list 172
error messages, numerical
list 172
gateway addresses 221
jams 181, 197
output quality 156
speed 162
Troubleshooting menu, control
panel 48
two-sided copying
default settings 21
two-sided printing
blank pages, default
settings 43
default settings 26
error messages 175
loading paper 109
Macintosh settings 149
problem-solving 169
types, media
selecting trays by 86
U
unexpected size or type error
messages 173
uninstalling Macintosh
software 12
universal print driver 9
Update Now feature, drivers 10
upgrading memory 250
upper-right door, locating 5
usage page, printing 142
USB cable, part number 231
USB configuration 54
USB port
locating 7
problem-solving
Macintosh 224
supported 4
Use Different Paper/Covers 102
V
validating gateway
addresses 221
vellum 64
vertical white or faded
stripes 217
voltage specifications 237
W
wake time, setting 27
Warning button, control panel
touchscreen 18
watermarks 101
wavy paper, problemsolving 168, 203
Web sites
fraud reports 151
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 147
Linux support 226
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 244
paper specifications 61
software, downloading 8
universal print driver 9
white lines or spots, problemsolving 203
white or faded stripes 217
Windows
driver features 100
driver settings 10, 100
ENWW
drivers supported 8, 9
problem-solving issues 222
software components 14
supported operating
systems 8
universal print driver 9
Windows 2000 fax 139
workflow, send to 132
wrinkled paper, problemsolving 203
ENWW
Index 273
274 Index
ENWW
© 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CE966-90901*
*CE966-90901*
CE966-90901
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement